Manual de Servicio MK4-5 (Parte 1) PDF

TM
NEW SOUTH WALES

MK4/5XR
VIDEO GAMING MACHINE
SERVICE MANUAL
AM-1121032-01
JUBILEE GAMING TECHNOLOGY,

A DIVISION OF ARISTOCRAT LEISURE INDUSTRIES PTY LTD (ACN 001 660 715)
71 Longueville Road, Lane Cove NSW 2066, Australia. Telephone: (612) 9413 6300
PO Box 808, Lane Cove NSW 1595, Australia. Fax: (612) 9420 1326
Aristocrat Leisure Industries Pty Ltd 2000
The gaming machine described in this document may be covered by patents and registered designs. This
document is protected by copyright. No part of it may be reproduced or copied without the written
permission of Aristocrat Leisure Industries Pty Ltd, Australia. This document is not for use in countries
where gaming machines are prohibited by law.
Aristocrat Leisure Industries Pty Ltd reserves the right to change, without notice, the design or
specification of the gaming machine covered by this document. Additional information is available from
time to time in the form of technical bulletins. New editions of this document may change its contents.
WARNING
This is a Class A product. In a domestic
environment, this product may cause radio
interference, in which case the user may be
required to take adequate action.
CAUTION
All functions of the machine are controlled by
complex electronics. Unqualified personnel
must not interfere with any mechanisms or
controls as this may permanently damage
the machine and lead to expensive repairs
or component replacement, and will render
the warranty void.
Important Safety Information

This document contains important information about the use of the equipment and hazards
involved in owning and operating the equipment to which it relates. The equipment can be very
hazardous if used other than in accordance with this document.
Inform Yourself and Your Staff

You must read this document before using the equipment or opening any part of the equipment. Ensure your
staff do too.
The equipment itself is marked with important warning labels detailing dangers.
Check for warning labels whenever opening any part of the equipment.
Read and comply with all warning labels you see when operating or opening the equipment.
Under no circumstances remove or alter any warning label.
Be Careful
If you dont follow the directions in this manual and on warning labels you increase the risk of the
following things occurring:
serious personal injury, including electrocution and amputation. Unless you are a trained technician, tampering
with the machine can kill you.
serious damage to the equipment;
serious damage to other equipment;
serious damage to the premises housing the equipment;
II Introduction
NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual Record of Amendments
Record of Amendments
Amendment Amendment Date Insertion Date Your Initials

Number
Introduction III
Record of Amendments NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual
Amendment Amendment Date Insertion Date Your Initials

Number
IV Introduction
NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual Table of Contents
Aristocrat Jubilee MK4/5XR Manuals
Operator Manual
Primarily intended for operators of Aristocrat

Mk4/5XR Video Gaming Machines. The Operator
Manual:
gives a general overview of the hardware and
software
provides procedures for daily operations and
simple maintenance.
Service Manual
Primarily intended for service technicians. The

Service Manual:
gives a general overview of the hardware and
software
provides instructions for installation and fault
finding
describes in detail each of the major
components of the machine.
Parts Catalogue
Primarily intended for operators and service

technicians. It enables operators and service
technicians to order machine parts. The Parts
Catalogue:
shows an illustration of each of the
components of the machine
links each illustration with a part number.
Introduction V
Table of Contents NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual
This page intentionally left blank
VI Introduction
Foreword
How To Use This Manual
Purpose of the Manual
This manual provides procedures for the servicing and maintenance of
Aristocrats Jubilee Mk4/5XR Series Video Gaming Machine. It covers areas of
machine operation that must be carried out by licensed technicians.
User of the Manual

The manual is aimed at technicians who need to understand detailed and
technically complex aspects of the machine to service and maintain it.
Warnings, Cautions and Notes
WARNING
A warning immediately precedes an
operating procedure or maintenance practice
which, if not correctly followed, could result
in personal injury or loss of life.
CAUTION
A caution immediately precedes an
operating procedure or maintenance practice
which, if not strictly observed, could result in
damage to or destruction of the equipment,
or corruption of the data.
Note
A note immediately precedes or follows an
operating procedure, maintenance practice
or condition which requires highlighting.
Units of Measure
The manual uses the international system of units. The following conversion is
provided for the convenience of readers.
1 W = 3.41241 Btu/hour 1 Btu/hour = 0.2930711 W
1 kJ = 0.948 Btu 1 Btu = 1.06 kJ.
Introduction VII
Brief History of Aristocrat Leisure Industries

Aristocrat Leisure Industries (ALI), established in 1953, is one of the oldest and most successful gaming machine manufacturers. ALI has supplied
machines to every country and region in the world where gaming machines are legal, including Austria, France, Germany, Holland, Malaysia, New
Zealand, the Philippines, Africa, Singapore, Russia, South America, and the USA.
Aristocrat Leisure Industries employs over 1,400 people and has the largest gaming research and development facility in the Southern Hemisphere.
Offices
Spare Parts Department
PO Box 155, Rosebery, NSW 1445, Australia
Outside Australia Tel: 612 9697 4146 Fax: 612 9697 4199
Within Australia Tel: 02 9697 4146 Fax: 02 9697 4199
Head Office International Offices

New South Wales New Zealand
Aristocrat Leisure Industries Pty Ltd (ACN 001 660 715), Auckland Office
71 Longueville Road, Lane Cove NSW 2066, Australia. Aristocrat Leisure Industries (NZ) Ltd,
PO Box 808, Lane Cove NSW 1595, Australia. 22 Vestey Drive, Mt. Wellington, Auckland, New Zealand.
Outside Australia Tel: 612 9413 6300 Fax 612 9420-1326 Tel: 0011 64 9 270 1600 Fax: 0015 64 9 270 1601
Within Australia Tel: 02 9413 6300 Fax 02 9420-1326 Christchurch Office
Unit D 5 Tenahaun Place, Sockburn,
Manufacturing / Operations Christchurch, New Zealand.
New South Wales Tel: 0011 64 3 338 7430 Fax: 0015 64 3 338 6492
Aristocrat Leisure Industries Pty Ltd (ACN 001 660 715),
Russia
85-113 Dunning Avenue, Rosebery NSW 2018, Australia.
Aristocrat (Russia),
GPO Box 134, 122108 Moscow, Russia.
Within Australia Tel: 02 9697 4000 Fax: 02 9693 1340
Tel / Fax: 0011 7 095 146 1326
National Offices UK
South Australia Aristocrat Europe
Aristocrat Leisure Industries Pty Ltd. Falcon Unit 1, Stonefield Way, South Ruislip,
75 Henley Beach Road, Middlesex HA4 OJS, England.
Mile End, South Australia 5031. Tel: 0011 44 181 426 5822 Fax: 0015 44 181 426 5762
USA
Within Australia Tel: 08 8443 3664 Fax 08 8443 3606
Nevada
Victoria Aristocrat Incorporated,
Aristocrat Leisure Industries Pty Ltd. 9895 Double R. Boulevard, Suite 200,
672 Lorimer Street, Port Melbourne, Victoria. 3207 Reno, Nevada 89511, USA.
Outside Australia Tel: 613 9644 1000 Fax: 613 9644 1032 Tel: 0011 1 702 850 7767 Fax: 0011 1 702 860 5646
Within Australia Tel: 03 9644 1000 Fax: 03 9644 1032 California
Aristocrat Incorporated,
Queensland 10960 W.River Street. #101E Truckee, CA 96161, USA.
Aristocrat Leisure Industries Pty. Ltd. Tel: 0011 1 916 582 9570 Fax: 0015 1 916 582 1305
60-62 Commercial Drive, Shailer Park, Qld. 4128, Australia
Outside Australia Tel: 617 3801 4444 Fax 617 3801 4403 Latin America
Within Australia Tel: 07 3801 4444 Fax 07 3801 4403 1500 N.W. 79 Avenue, Miami, Florida, 33126 USA
Tel: 0011 1 305 594 2881 Fax: 0015 1 305 594 9022
Western Australia
Aristocrat Leisure Industries Pty. Ltd.
South Africa
PO Box 8206, Perth Business Centre, Perth WA 6846 ALI Gaming Solutions (Pty.) Ltd.,
Outside Australia Tel: 618 9355 1212 Fax: 618 9355 1213 PO Box 2570, Bramley 2018, South Africa.
Within Australia Tel: (08) 9355 1212 Fax: (08) 9355 1213 Tel: 0011 27 11 448 2320/1 Fax: 0015 27 11 448 2322
Japan
Tel: 0011 813 576 00071 Fax: 0015 813 576 00072
VIII Introduction
Table of Contents
General Description 1-1
1.1 Physical Description....................................................................... 1-3
1.2 Basic Operation .............................................................................. 1-8
1.2.1 Play Mode......................................................................................... 1-8

1.2.2 Operator Mode................................................................................ 1-10
Installation 2-1
2.1 Pre-Installation Requirements ....................................................... 2-3
2.2 Inspection on Delivery.................................................................... 2-5
2.3 Installation Procedure .................................................................... 2-5
2.3.1 Mounting ........................................................................................... 2-5

2.3.2 Pre-start Connections, Checks and Power Up ................................. 2-7
2.3.3 Commissioning the Machine............................................................. 2-8
Machine Modes 3-1

3.1 Modes of Operation ........................................................................ 3-3
3.2 Play Mode ........................................................................................ 3-4
3.2.1 Player Operation............................................................................... 3-5

3.2.2 Video Display.................................................................................... 3-7
3.2.3 Sounds and Tunes............................................................................ 3-8
3.2.4 Pushbuttons...................................................................................... 3-8
3.2.5 Machine Self-Monitoring ................................................................... 3-8
3.2.7 Electromechanical Meters .............................................................. 3-11
3.2.9 Audit Meters (Soft Meters).............................................................. 3-13
3.3 Operator Mode .............................................................................. 3-14
3.3.1 Machine Identification ..................................................................... 3-16
x Revision 01
3.3.2 Accounting Information................................................................... 3-16

3.3.3 Diagnostic Information Menu.......................................................... 3-21
3.3.4 Self Test Mode ............................................................................... 3-24
3.3.5 Operator Setup / Selections Mode ................................................. 3-30
3.3.6 Power Save Mode .......................................................................... 3-33
3.3.7 Current Lockup Menu Fault Mode ............................................... 3-33
Cabinet, Door and Top Box 4-1

4.1 General Description ....................................................................... 4-3
4.2 Technical Description .................................................................... 4-5
4.2.1 Cabinet Door .................................................................................... 4-5

4.2.2 Latch Bar .......................................................................................... 4-5
4.2.3 Keyed Lock....................................................................................... 4-7
4.2.4 Cabinet Security ............................................................................... 4-7
4.2.5 Key Switches .................................................................................... 4-9
4.2.6 Bilock Locks.................................................................................... 4-10
4.2.7 Cash Box and Chute ...................................................................... 4-11
4.2.8 Logic Cage ..................................................................................... 4-11
4.2.9 Game Display Shelf........................................................................ 4-12
4.2.10 Cabinet Door Fluorescent Lighting ................................................. 4-12
4.2.11 Cabinet Door Artwork ..................................................................... 4-13
4.2.12 Mid Trim Panel ............................................................................... 4-14
4.2.13 Playbuttons..................................................................................... 4-14
4.2.14 Top Trim Panel ............................................................................... 4-17
4.2.15 Monitor Mask .................................................................................. 4-18
4.2.16 Coin Tray ........................................................................................ 4-19
4.2.17 Belly Panel Door............................................................................. 4-19
4.2.18 Belly Panel Security........................................................................ 4-20
4.2.19 Top Box .......................................................................................... 4-20
4.2.20 Top Box Artwork ............................................................................. 4-20
4.2.21 Top Box Fluorescent Lighting ......................................................... 4-20
4.3 General Maintenance ................................................................... 4-23
Revision 01 xi
Power Supply Assembly 5-1

5.1 Physical Description....................................................................... 5-3
5.2 Basic Operation .............................................................................. 5-5
5.3 Functional Specification ................................................................ 5-7
5.3.1 Input Requirements .......................................................................... 5-7

5.3.2 Output Requirements........................................................................ 5-7
5.3.3 Control Signals ................................................................................. 5-9
5.3.4 Physical Connections ....................................................................... 5-9
5.4 Removal and Replacement Procedures ..................................... 5-11
5.4.1 Fuses .............................................................................................. 5-11

5.4.2 Power Supply Assembly ................................................................. 5-11
5.5 General Maintenance.................................................................... 5-12
Coin Handling Assembly 6-1

6.1 Overview .......................................................................................... 6-3
6.2 Basic Operation .............................................................................. 6-4
6.2.1 Validation .......................................................................................... 6-4

6.2.2 Rejected Coins ................................................................................. 6-5
6.2.3 Accepted Coins................................................................................. 6-5
6.2.4 Alarm ................................................................................................ 6-6
6.2.5 Inhibit All ........................................................................................... 6-6
6.2.6 Self Calibration ................................................................................. 6-6
6.2.6 Diagnostics ....................................................................................... 6-6
6.2.7 Debris Flap ....................................................................................... 6-6
6.3 Removal and Replacement ............................................................ 6-7
6.4 Clearing Coin Jams ........................................................................ 6-7
6.5 CN133A Coin Validator Connector Pinouts .................................. 6-8
xii Revision 01
6.6 Diverter Solenoid and Photo-Optic Sensor .................................. 6-9
6.6.1 Physical Description ......................................................................... 6-9

6.6.2 Basic Operation ................................................................................ 6-9
6.6.3 Removal and Replacement ............................................................ 6-10
6.7 Fault Finding ................................................................................. 6-11
Bank Note Acceptor 7-1

7.1.1 Overview........................................................................................... 7-3

7.1.3 VFM4 Non-isolated Serial Interface................................................ 7-10
7.2 Installation and Machine Conditions .......................................... 7-13
7.2.1 Configuration Setup........................................................................ 7-13

7.2.2 Machine Condition Indicators ......................................................... 7-13
7.3.1 Clearing the Bank Note Stacker ..................................................... 7-15

7.3.2 Bank Note Acceptor Assembly ....................................................... 7-16
7.3.3 Clearing Bank Note Acceptor Jams................................................ 7-16
7.4 Care and Maintenance ................................................................. 7-18
7.4.1 Troubleshooting.............................................................................. 7-18

7.4.2 Periodic Maintenance ..................................................................... 7-20
7.4.3 Video Level Calibration................................................................... 7-20
Hopper 8-1

8.1.2 Basic Operation ................................................................................ 8-6
8.1.3 Functional Description ...................................................................... 8-7
8.1.4 Hopper Interface Signals .................................................................. 8-7
Revision 01 xiii
8.2.1 Removal............................................................................................ 8-8

8.2.2 Replacement..................................................................................... 8-8
8.3 Clearing Coin Jams ........................................................................ 8-9
8.4 Disassembly and Assembly......................................................... 8-10
8.4.1 Disassembly ................................................................................... 8-10

8.4.2 Assembly ........................................................................................ 8-11
8.5 Fault Finding ................................................................................. 8-12
8.6 General Maintenance.................................................................... 8-13
Video Monitor 9-1

9.1 Ceronix Monitor - General Description ......................................... 9-3
9.2.1 Power Supply.................................................................................... 9-4

9.2.2 Adjustment Procedures .................................................................... 9-4
9.4 General Maintenance...................................................................... 9-6
9.5 Degaussing ..................................................................................... 9-7
Electromechanical Meters 10-1

10.1 General Description...................................................................... 10-3
10.2 Functional Description ................................................................. 10-4
10.2.1 Serial Interface................................................................................ 10-4

10.2.2 Overcurrent Protection.................................................................... 10-5
10.2.3 Meter Drive Outputs........................................................................ 10-5
10.2.4 PCB Expansion............................................................................... 10-5
10.2.5 Light Tower Interface ...................................................................... 10-5
10.2.6 Security Interface............................................................................ 10-5
xiv Revision 01
10.2.7 Meter Detection .............................................................................. 10-5
10.4 Connector Pin Assignment.......................................................... 10-8
10.5 General Maintenance ................................................................. 10-10
Main Board 11-1

11.1 Introduction................................................................................... 11-4
11.2 Physical Description .................................................................... 11-5
11.2.1 Diagrams and Component Locations ............................................. 11-5
11.3 Functional Description................................................................ 11-6
11.3.1 Main Board Functions..................................................................... 11-7
11.4 Technical Description ................................................................. 11-8
11.4.1 ARM250 Microprocessor .............................................................. 11-10

11.4.2 Sound ........................................................................................... 11-11
11.4.3 Video ............................................................................................ 11-12
11.4.4 Reset ............................................................................................ 11-12
11.4.5 Debug (Keyboard) Port................................................................. 11-13
11.4.6 Debugging .................................................................................... 11-13
11.4.7 External I/O Expansion ................................................................. 11-14
11.4.8 Mikohn Link Progressive Interface (where fitted).......................... 11-14
11.4.9 Memory......................................................................................... 11-15
11.4.10 Real Time Clock .......................................................................... 11-16
11.4.11 Battery Backup Circuit................................................................. 11-16
11.4.12 Power Control Interface............................................................... 11-17
11.4.13 SPI Bus Driver and Multiplexer Circuitry...................................... 11-18
11.4.14 Printer and Mechanical Meters.................................................... 11-19
11.4.15 Mechanical Switches................................................................... 11-19
11.4.16 Security ....................................................................................... 11-19
11.4.17 Coin Handling System................................................................. 11-20
11.4.18 Hopper Interface ......................................................................... 11-21
Revision 01 xv
11.4.19 Serial Channels ........................................................................... 11-21

11.4.20 Bank Note Acceptor..................................................................... 11-22
11.4.21 Interface Board ............................................................................ 11-22
11.5 Removal and Replacement Procedures .................................. 11-23
11.6 Description of Connectors......................................................... 11-24
11.6.1 Communications Configuration Board .......................................... 11-24

11.6.2 Optically Isolated Connector - P20 ............................................... 11-26
11.6.3 Miscellaneous Connector - P22 .................................................... 11-28
11.6.4 Security and I/O Expansion Connector - P21 ............................... 11-30
Interface Board Part No. 410315 Issue B 12-1

12.1 Physical Description..................................................................... 12-3
12.1.1 Diagrams and Component Locations ............................................. 12-3
12.2 Technical Description .................................................................. 12-5
12.3 Description of Connectors........................................................... 12-7
12.3.1 Main Board Connectors - P1, P2, and P3....................................... 12-7

12.3.2 Driver Board, P4 ............................................................................. 12-7
12.3.3 LAB Comms, P5 ............................................................................. 12-7
12.3.4 Mechanical Meters, P6 ................................................................... 12-7
12.3.5 Security - P8, P22, and P24 ........................................................... 12-7
12.3.6 Door Signals Interface - P10 and P11 ............................................ 12-9
12.3.7 Coin Handling, P12....................................................................... 12-10
12.3.8 Bill Acceptor, Backlight and Security, P13 .................................... 12-11
12.3.9 Serial Channels - P14, P15, P17, and P18................................... 12-11
12.3.10 DACOM 5000, P21...................................................................... 12-13
12.3.11 Mikohn, P16................................................................................. 12-13
12.3.12 SPI Channel 1, P19 ..................................................................... 12-14
12.3.13 DACOM 3000, P20...................................................................... 12-14
12.3.14 Spare Voltage 24 V DC, P23....................................................... 12-15
12.3.15 Hopper, P25 ................................................................................ 12-15
12.3.16 Video, P26 ................................................................................... 12-15
xvi Revision 01
12.3.17 Mechanical Switches - P27 ......................................................... 12-16

12.3.18 Audit / Jackpot switch and door security, P28 ............................. 12-16
12.3.19 Power Supply, P29...................................................................... 12-17
12.3.20 Optional Fan DC 12 V, P30......................................................... 12-17
12.4 Removal and Replacement Procedures ................................... 12-18
I/O Driver Board - 410415 13-1

13.1.1 Circuit Diagrams and Component Locations .................................. 13-3
13.2 Functional Description................................................................. 13-3
13.2.1 Power Supply ................................................................................. 13-6

13.2.2 Pushbuttons and Lamps................................................................. 13-6
13.2.3 Coin Handling Interface .................................................................. 13-7
13.3 Removal and Replacement Procedures ................................... 13-10
13.4 Connector Pin Assignment........................................................ 13-11
Communications Configuration Board - 410217 14-1

14.2 Functional Description................................................................. 14-4
14.4 Connector Pin Assignments........................................................ 14-7
LAB Communications Board - 410174 15-1

15.1 Technical Description .................................................................. 15-3
15.1.1 Physical Description ....................................................................... 15-3

15.1.2 Basic Operation .............................................................................. 15-6
15.1.3 LAB PSU Chassis Description........................................................ 15-7
Revision 01 xvii
15.2 Removal and Replacement ........................................................ 15-10
15.2.1 Removal........................................................................................ 15-10

15.2.2 Replacement................................................................................. 15-10
15.3 Connector Pin Assignments ...................................................... 15-11
15.3.1 Interface Board Slot P6................................................................. 15-11
15.4 General Maintenance.................................................................. 15-13
Progressive Jackpot System 16-1

16.1 Overview ........................................................................................ 16-3
16.2. Progressive SEI Board (410227).................................................. 16-3
Machine Fault Finding 17-1

17.1 Fault Finding ................................................................................. 17-3
Games A-1
Spinning Reel Games ................................................................................... A-3
Glossary
Index
xviii Revision 01
List of Figures
Figure 1-1 Mk4/5XR Series Video Gaming Machine - External View ............................. 1-5
Figure 1-2 Bilock "U" Shaped Keyway and Quick Change Core Features...................... 1-7
Figure 1-3 Basic Game Operation in Play Mode ............................................................. 1-9
Figure 2-1 Machine Dimensions...................................................................................... 2-4
Figure 2-2 Machine Footprint and Clearances ................................................................ 2-6
Figure 3-1 Format of Game Display ................................................................................ 3-4
Figure 3-2 Centre Line and Multi Line Combinations ...................................................... 3-7
Figure 3-3 Typical Pushbutton Layout ............................................................................. 3-8
Figure 3-4 Electromechanical Meters............................................................................ 3-12
Figure 3-5 Operator Mode Menu Displays - Structure................................................... 3-15
Figure 4-1 Cabinet and Cabinet Door - General Description .......................................... 4-4
Figure 4-2 Latch Bar........................................................................................................ 4-6
Figure 4-3 Keyed Lock Assembly.................................................................................... 4-7
Figure 4-4 Photo-optic Emitter Adjustment ...................................................................... 4-8
Figure 4-5 Key Switches: Removal and Replacement .................................................. 4-10
Figure 4-6 Bilock "U" Shaped Keyway and Quick Change Core Features.................... 4-10
Figure 4-7 Play Button Lamps ....................................................................................... 4-15
Figure 4-8 Playbutton - Exploded View ......................................................................... 4-17
Figure 4-9 Top Trim Panel and Monitor Mask.............................................................. 4-18
Figure 4-10 Top Box...................................................................................................... 4-21
Figure 5-1 Power Supply Assembly Location .................................................................. 5-3
Figure 5-2 Power Supply Assembly................................................................................. 5-4
Figure 5-3 Power Supply Assembly Wiring Diagram ...................................................... 5-5
Figure 5-4 Low Voltage Power Distribution ..................................................................... 5-6
Figure 6-1 Condor Coin Handling Assembly ................................................................... 6-3
Figure 6-2 Condor Coin Validator.................................................................................... 6-5
Figure 6-3 Diverter Solenoid and Photo-Optic Sensor .................................................... 6-9
Figure 7-1 Bank Note Acceptor Assembly ...................................................................... 7-4
Figure 7-2 Bank Note Acceptor Dual Cage Assembly .................................................... 7-5
Figure 7-3 Bank Note Acceptor with open Upper Guide ................................................. 7-6
Figure 7-4 Stacker ............................................................................................................ 7-7
Figure 7-5 Typical Mid Trim Layout ................................................................................. 7-8
Figure 7-6 Input/Output Connector.................................................................................. 7-9
Figure 7-7 Interconnection Diagram ................................................................................ 7-9
Figure 7-8 Bezel Assembly Indicators - LED Displays .................................................. 7-10
Figure 7-9 VFM4 Protocol - Accept and Return Messages........................................... 7-11
Figure 7-10 VFM4 Protocol - Hex Code Messages....................................................... 7-12
Figure 7-11 Operator Setup Mode - Machine Options .................................................. 7-13
Figure 7-12 Bank Note Acceptor - DIP Switch Location................................................ 7-19
Figure 8-1 Hopper Location (Standard Disc Hopper shown) .......................................... 8-3
Figure 8-2 Hopper- rear view (Standard Disc Hopper Shown)....................................... 8-4
Figure 8-3 Hopper - exploded view (Standard Disc Hopper Shown).............................. 8-5
Figure 8-4 Hopper Photo-optic Detector ....................................................................... 8-13
Figure 9-1 Ceronix Video Monitor and Control Panel...................................................... 9-5
Figure 10-1 Electromechanical Meter Board - Location ................................................ 10-3
Figure 10-2 Electromechanical Meter Board - 410366 Block Diagram ......................... 10-4
Figure 10-3 Electromechanical Meter Board - 410366 Component and Solder
Sides ............................................................................................................... 10-6
Figure 11-1 Location of Main Board .............................................................................. 11-5
Figure 11-2 System Architecture ................................................................................... 11-6
Figure 11-3 Main Board block diagram ......................................................................... 11-8
Figure 11-4 Typical Main Board layout (not detailed) .................................................... 11-9
Figure 12-1 Interface Board Component Location ........................................................ 12-4
Figure 13-1 I/O Driver Board - Location ........................................................................ 13-3
Figure 13-2 I/O Driver Board - Block Diagram .............................................................. 13-4
Figure 13-3 I/O Driver Board 410415 - Component Layout........................................... 13-5
Figure 13-4 Coin Handling Interface Signals................................................................. 13-7
Figure 13-5 Timing of Coin Handling Output Signals .................................................... 13-8
Revision 01 xix
Figure 14-1 Communications Configuration Board - Location ......................................14-3

Figure 14-2 Communications Configuration Board - Block Diagram ............................14-4
Figure 15-1 LAB Communications Board - position in logic cage .................................15-3
Figure 15-2 LAB Communications Board - Component Layout ....................................15-5
Figure 15-3 LAB Communications Board - Block Diagram ...........................................15-6
Figure 15-4 LAB PSU Chassis ......................................................................................15-8
Figure 15-5 PSU Chassis - PSU Fuse and Connector Wiring ......................................15-8
Figure 15-6 LAB Communications Board and PSU Kit .................................................15-9
Figure 16-1 SEI Board - data flows ...............................................................................16-4
Figure 16-2 Cashcade - data flows................................................................................16-6
Figure A-1 MK V Video Game Screen Example...............................................................0-4
Figure A-2 MK V Pay Table Example ..............................................................................0-5
List of Tables
Table 1-1 Machine Modules ............................................................................................1-3
Table 1-2 Machine Key Types .........................................................................................1-6
Table 3-1 Operator Mode Menu ....................................................................................3-14
Table 3-2 Machine Identification Display.......................................................................3-16
Table 3-3 Accounting Information Menu........................................................................3-17
Table 3-4 Accounting Information - Jurisdictional Meters - Screen 1............................3-17
Table 3-6 Accounting Information - Periodic Meters - Screen 1....................................3-18
Table 3-8 Accounting Information - Reset Periodic Meters...........................................3-19
Table 3-9 Accounting Information - Game Replay ........................................................3-19
Table 3-10 Accounting Information Meters of Last Game..........................................3-20
Table 3-11 Accounting Information - Game Statistics ...................................................3-20
Table 3-12 Accounting Information - Gamble Statistics ................................................3-21
Table 3-13 Diagnostic Information Menu.......................................................................3-21
Table 3-14 Diagnostic Information - Diagnostic Meters - Screen 1...............................3-22
Table 3-16 Diagnostic Information - Error Log ..............................................................3-23
Table 3-17 Diagnostic Information - Panic Log .............................................................3-23
Table 3-18 Diagnostic Information - Bill Acceptor Information ......................................3-24
Table 3-19 Self Test Mode Menu ..................................................................................3-24
Table 3-20 Self Test Mode Requirements.....................................................................3-25
Table 3-21 Self Test Mode - Lamp Test........................................................................3-25
Table 3-22 Self Test Mode - Coin Entry Test ................................................................3-26
Table 3-23 Self Test Mode - Hopper Test .....................................................................3-26
Table 3-24 Self Test Mode - Video Monitor Test Menu.................................................3-27
Table 3-25 Self Test Mode - Video Monitor Test Descriptions......................................3-27
Table 3-26 Self Test Mode - Sound Effects Test ..........................................................3-28
Table 3-27 Self Test Mode - Factory Test .....................................................................3-28
Table 3-28 Self Test Mode.- Combination Test.............................................................3-29
Table 3-29 Self Test Mode - Combination Test Result .................................................3-29
Table 3-30 Operator Setup / Selections Menu ..............................................................3-30
Table 3-31 Operator Setup/Selections - Machine Options Display ...............................3-31
Table 3-32 Operator Setup/Selections - Real Time Clock Setup ..................................3-32
Table 3-33 Operator Setup/Selections - Sound System Setup .....................................3-32
Table 3-34 Operator Setup/Selections - Reel Spin Speed Setup...................................3-32
Table 3-35 Operator Setup/Selections - Layout Setup ..................................................3-33
Table 3-36 Power Save Mode .......................................................................................3-33
Table 3-37 Fault Mode - Current Active Lockup Menu..................................................3-34
Table 3-38 Fault Mode - Current Active Lockup Help Screens .....................................3-35
Table 6-1 Condor Validator Interface Signals..................................................................6-8
Table 6-2 Fault Finding..................................................................................................6-11
Table 7-1 Bank Note Acceptor Fault Finding.................................................................7-18
Table 7-2 Bank Note Acceptor DIP Switch Functions ...................................................7-19
xx Revision 01
Table 8-1 Fault Finding.................................................................................................. 8-12

Table 10-1 J1 - Main Connector to Interface Board ...................................................... 10-8
Table 10-2 J2 - Meter Drive Output Interface................................................................ 10-8
Table 10-3 J3 - Additional Meters Interface .................................................................. 10-9
Table 10-4 J4 - Light Tower Interface ........................................................................... 10-9
Table 10-5 S1 - Security Interface................................................................................. 10-9
Table 11-1 Serial EEPROMs Characteristics.............................................................. 11-16
Table 11-2 Power Control System Signal Lines .......................................................... 11-17
Table 11-3 SPI Channel Signals ................................................................................. 11-18
Table 11-4 Optical Security Sensor Assignment......................................................... 11-19
Table 11-5 Mechanical Security Switch Assignment................................................... 11-20
Table 11-6 Coin Handling Signals ............................................................................... 11-20
Table 11-7 Hopper Control Signals ............................................................................. 11-21
Table 11-8 Communications Configuration Board connector - P23............................ 11-24
Table 11-9 Optically Isolated Connector - P20............................................................ 11-26
Table 11-10 Miscellaneous Connector - P22 .............................................................. 11-28
Table 11-11 Security and I/O Expansion Connector - P21.......................................... 11-30
Table 12-1 Interface Board Connections....................................................................... 12-6
Table 13-1 Coin Handling Signals - Explanation ........................................................... 13-8
Table 13-2 LED Functions............................................................................................. 13-9
Table 15-1 LAB Port 1 Pinout........................................................................................ 15-4
Table 15-2 LAB Ports 2-6 Pinout................................................................................... 15-4
Table 15-3 Interface Board Bus Connector for LAB Communications Board ............. 15-11
Table 16-1 SEI Board Configurations............................................................................ 16-3
Table 16-2 DIP Switch Settings..................................................................................... 16-5
Table 16-3 Mikohn Interface.......................................................................................... 16-7
Table 16-4 Machine Interface........................................................................................ 16-7
Table 16-5 CDS Display Interface ................................................................................. 16-8
Table 16-6 Mikohn RS-422/485 Serial Interface ........................................................... 16-8
Table 17-1 Fault Finding................................................................................................ 17-3
Revision 01 xxi
NSW MK4/5 Video Service Manual General Description
_____Chapter 1_____
General Description
1.1 Physical Description .............................................................. 1-3
1.2 Basic Operation...................................................................... 1-8
1.2.1 Play Mode ................................................................................ 1-8

1.2.2 Operator Mode ....................................................................... 1-10
Revision 01 1-1
General Description NSW MK4/5 Video Service Manual
List of Figures
Figure 1-1 Mk4/5XR Series Video Gaming Machine - External View..............................1-5
Figure 1-2 Bilock "U" Shaped Keyway and Quick Change Core Features......................1-7
Figure 1-3 Basic Game Operation in Play Mode .............................................................1-9
List of Tables
Table 1-1 Machine Modules ............................................................................................1-3
Table 1-2 Machine Key Types .........................................................................................1-6
1-2 Revision 01
1.1 Physical Description

Aristocrats Jubilee Mk4/5XR series of gaming machines have been developed to
comply with existing and future regulations and to the same technoligcal standard
as the Aristocrat MVP machine.
The machine consists of existing 540 Mk4 cabinets that have been modified to
accept the high standard of the MVP electronics currently being produced by
Aristocrat.
The Mk4/5XR Series gaming machines feature:

Advanced, high-performance electronics based on ARM RISC technology;
A wide range of machine options, including note and coin denominations,
communication links, and progressive systems;
A comprehensive security system;
Modular design and construction;
Simplified operation and maintenance procedures;
High resolution video displays, advanced animation and graphics, and
improved sounds and tunes.
The following table briefly identifies the various modules of the gaming machine.
Figure 1-1 shows the location of machine modules.
Table 1-1 Machine Modules

Machine Module Description
Cabinet, Door and Top The physical outer enclosure which provides for the location and mounting of
Box. other modules.
Video Monitor High resolution 640 x 400 pixels for improved-quality graphics. The monitor is
the main medium for displaying game operation and status to the player.
Main Board The Main printed circuit board (PCB) provides primary control of the MVP
Video Gaming Machine. The Main Board is interfaced (via the Interface
Board) to all the major components of the machine. The board receives
signals from, and sends control signals to machine components. The Main
Board houses the central processor and other logic components for game
generation, video, security items, power control, memory storage, and
communications.
Interface Board The interface board houses an array of connectors which are used to
(may also be called the electrically connect (via direct mechanical coupling or through looms and
Backplane). ribbon cables) the various electrical components of the machine to the Main
Board.
I/O Driver Board The I/O Driver Board drives the lamps, receives inputs from the pushbuttons,
interfaces with the coin handling system, and provides a battery-backed
circuit for security monitoring (if required).
Communication The Communication Configuration Board (CCB) 'piggy-backs' to the Main
Configuration Board Board. The board is used to set up the communications channels of the Main
Board (up to three) for the bank note acceptor and printer.
Revision 01 1-3
LAB Communications The LAB communications board mounts directly to the interface board. The
Board board provides up to six extra ports for communications to various subsidiary
equipment as required by the New South Wales Liquor Administration Board.
The LAB PSU Chassis that provides power connections to the six interfaces
is located behind the video monitor.
Mechanical Meter The mechanical meter board controls the functions of the electromechanical
Board meters that are used to record accounting data in a physical format. The
signals for the meters are received from the Main Board via the Interface
Board.
Logic Cage The logic cage consists of a secure, steel cabinet that houses the Main,
Communications Configuration, I/O Driver and LAB PCBAs. The section of
the Interface Board that interfaces with the Main Board and the I/O Driver
Board is also located within the logic cage.
Power Supply The power supply assembly converts the AC mains input voltage into low
Assembly voltage DC power for the various machine modules and circuits. Power is
directed via the Interface Board to the machine components. The video
monitor and the fluorescent lighting system receive AC power directly from
the power supply assembly.
Hopper The hopper acts as a holding unit for coins. When instructed by the main
board, the hopper returns coins to the player. For each coin ejected, the
hopper sends a signal to the Main Board. When the required number of coins
have been dispensed, the Main Board signals the hopper motor to stop.
Coin Handling System The function of the coin handling system is to check the validity of coins
inserted, establish a count and pass signals for processing. The coin handling
system directs coins to the hopper, cash box, or coin tray.
Bank Note Acceptor The function of the bank note acceptor is to accept valid note currency and
register the appropriate number of credits for game play. A note stacker is
used to store the notes and to record monetary and statistical information.
1-4 Revision 01
DOORS, FRONT PANELS &

DENOMINATION PATCHES
Top Box
Top Box Lock

Top Trim
Top Box Latch
Monitor
Electromechanical
Meters
Mid Trim Jackpot Key Switch

Audit Key Switch
Belly Panel
Belly Panel Lock
Main Door Lock
Main Door Latch
Coin Tray
I0126
Figure 1-1 Mk4/5XR Series Video Gaming Machine - External View
Revision 01 1-5
Machine Keys
The gaming machine requires keys for the following locks and switches to
establish effective security and correct operation. Refer to Figure 1-1 for lock and
keyswitch positions.
Note
A key may only be removed from its lock or
key switch after it has been returned to the
locked position.
Table 1-2 Machine Key Types

Name Function Type
Audit Key Enables entry to the Operator Mode Menu (see
Switch Machine Modes).
Insert the Audit Key and turn it 90 clockwise.
I0004
Cabinet Door Allows the operator to open the cabinet door.

Lock Insert the cabinet door key and turn it 180
clockwise, then lift the latch to release the door.
I0005
Jackpot Reset Allows the operator to reset the machine after a

Key Switch - machine fault has been corrected (see Machine
also called the Modes).
Cancel Credit Insert the Cancel Credit key, turn it 90 clockwise
Key Switch then back again. I0006
Logic Cage Allows the operator access to the PCB logic cage.
Lock (if fitted) Insert the logic cage key and turn it 180
clockwise.
I0005
Bank Note Allows operator access to the bank note stacker.

Acceptor Turn key 180 clockwise to open.
Cage Door
Lock(s) I0005
(optional)
Bank Note Allows the operator to remove the notes from the
Stacker Door stacker.
Lock Insert the key and turn it 90 clockwise, open the
stacker door and remove the notes. I0007
Top Box Door Allows the operator to open the top box.
Lock Insert the top box key and turn it 180 clockwise,
then press in the top box latch pin release the
door. I0005
1-6 Revision 01
Belly Panel Allows the operator to open the belly panel door to
Door Lock gain access to the bank note stacker. Insert the
key and turn it 180 clockwise.
I0005
Bilock Locks
The gaming machines may be fitted with high-security Bilock camlocks and
switchlocks with a unique "U" shaped keyway (see Figure 1-2). The locks feature
the Quick Change Core facility whereby the keyed core of the lock is fitted
separate to the lock barrel. Locks may be rekeyed in a matter of seconds without
having to dismantle the lock assembly.
To remove a lock assembly, simply unscrew the large nut on the lock barrel and
pull out the lock assembly.
Bilock Key Quick Change Core

Figure 1-2 Bilock "U" Shaped Keyway and Quick Change Core Features
Revision 01 1-7
1.2 Basic Operation

The functions of the gaming machine are controlled by an advanced software and
hardware platform that provides operators with greater control over machine
functions and simplifies maintenance and machine setup. New games developed
with the software provide higher quality graphics, new sounds and a wider variety
of features.
All processing is carried out on the Main Board. The Main Board contains the
central processor and the game EPROMs which hold the software required for
game generation and video graphics. All data and control signals to and from the
Main Board are distributed by the Interface Board. The Interface Board also
distributes regulated low voltage power from the power control system.
The machine has two major modes of operation: Play mode and Operator mode.
The machine is in Play Mode when the cabinet door is closed and locked, the
Audit key switch is in the OFF position and there are no fault or lock-up
conditions.
The machine is in Operator Mode when the Audit key switch is in the ON
position. Operator Mode provides for a range of operational procedures, data
displays, and specific machine functions. Normal gameplay is disabled during
Operator Mode.
1.2.1 Play Mode

When in Play Mode, the machine:
permits gameplay,
operates security and audit features,
runs self-checking and testing continuously,
monitors and records gameplay activities continuously,
displays comments and guidance for players, operators and technicians.
Basic machine operation in Play Mode is shown in Figure 1-3. Depending on the
machine configuration, credits may be registered by inserting coins, bank notes or
tokens. The machine has security features for screening the currency tendered to
ensure that only valid currency is accepted.
If the currency is accepted by the machine, the playbuttons on the mid trim
become active and flash. The player may then insert more currency, play a game
by pressing one of the flashing playbuttons, or have the machine return the current
credit total by pressing the COLLECT pushbutton. The player determines how
many credits to wager by pressing one of the BET playbuttons, and the BET meter
on the display screen shows the credits wagered.
1-8 Revision 01
Central
Processor
PLAYER INSERTS CREDITS
AUDIT DATA CONTROL

Coin/Token Bank Note INFORMATION
Invalid Currency
Returned To Player
AUDIT Communications
REJECT DATA Interface
Machine
Registers Credits
ACCEPT
Machine Checks
Currency Validity ADD
WIN
Win Credits
To Be Added Player Presses
Selected Pushbutton AUDIT
DATA
COLLECT
PLAY YES
WIN
NO
WIN
Credits are Paid

Remaining to Player
Credit
Machine Displays NO
Game Outcome
I0011
Figure 1-3 Basic Game Operation in Play Mode
Revision 01 1-9
Once the player starts a game by pressing one of the active playbuttons, the
machine runs the game sequence and displays the outcome on the screen. If the
result is a winning combination, the player may gamble the win (if the gamble
feature is available); otherwise, the machine increments the credits won. If the
result is not a winning combination, the player may continue gameplay provided
there are credits remaining.
The machine is equipped with electronic audit (soft) meters which continuously
monitor and record credit movement and game activity. Electromechanical meters
are also fitted. The electronic audit meters are accessed through the Operator
Mode. The information in these meters is used for audit calculations and security
purposes.
If the machine encounters an abnormal condition, it alerts the operator by
automatically entering Machine Lockup. In lockup, gameplay is disabled to
prevent any further player interaction and guidance information is displayed in the
game message area. The lockup condition can be identified by examining the
Current Lockup screen which is accessed from the Operator Mode Menu. Each
lockup condition has an associated help screen that provides information on how
to fix the problem and remove the lockup.
1.2.2 Operator Mode

Within Operator Mode (Audit Key ON), the following options are available:
machine identification
accounting information
diagnostic information
self test mode
operator setup/selections
power save modetion mode
current lockup information.
In Operator Mode, the electronic audit meters and the electromechanical meters do
not function. Menu selections may be used to review the machine details, select
new configurations, and carry out machine tests. Refer to the chapter Machine
Modes for detailed information.
1-10 Revision 01
NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual Installation
________Chapter 2________
Installation
2.1 Pre-Installation Requirements ..................................................... 2-3
2.2 Inspection on Delivery .................................................................. 2-5
2.3 Installation Procedure................................................................... 2-5
2.3.1 Mounting ......................................................................................... 2-5

2.3.2 Pre-start Connections, Checks and Power Up ................................ 2-7
2.3.3 Commissioning the Machine ........................................................... 2-8
Revision 01 2-1
Installation NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual
List of Figures
Figure 2-1 Machine Dimensions......................................................................................2-4
Figure 2-2 Machine Footprint and Clearances ................................................................2-6
2-2 Revision 01
2.1 Pre-Installation Requirements

The following items are required to install a machine:
verification of jurisdictional approval.
a floor plan (only required for new installations).
a suitable base on which to mount the machine.
adequate clearance between the sides of adjacent machines to allow the doors
to be opened (a clearance of 180 mm is recommended).
access to mains power outlets and connection cables of peripheral devices.
machine keys (if locks are fitted).
See Figure 2-1 for machine dimensions.
WARNING
The gaming machine is a heavy item. To
avoid personal injury, follow the national
standard and code of practice for manual
handling.
WARNING
This is a Class A product. In a domestic
environment, this product may cause radio
interference in which case the user may e
required to take adequate action.
CAUTION
The gaming machine must be transported
and handled with care. Ensure the machine
is not dropped or severely bumped.
Important Note
All mains power wiring must be installed by a
qualified electrician and comply with
Australian standard AS/NZS 3000-2000, or
equivalent national/jurisdictional standards
for mains wiring.
Revision 01 2-3
High Boy
1460 mm
Top Box
Casino
1180 mm
Note 2.
Monitor
Note 1.
Mid Trim Low Boy

860 mm
Belly
Panel
Coin Tray
I0186
Depth Width
630 mm 500 mm
Note 1: Note 2:
Accomodates monitor Box fitted to cover
picture tube. mechanical meters
where no top box is fitted
(approx. height 50 mm).
Figure 2-1 Machine Dimensions
2-4 Revision 01
2.2 Inspection on Delivery

Inspect all exterior panels of the cabinet for damage that may have occurred
during transportation. Report any damage to your supervisor.
2.3 Installation Procedure
Note
Installation and commissioning of machines
must be carried out by an appropriately
licensed technician and must comply with
the regulations of the jurisdictional authority.
The following procedures are for mounting, connecting, and commissioning the
gaming machine into service.
2.3.1 Mounting
WARNING
The gaming machine is a heavy item. To
prevent personal injury, follow the national
handling.
Mount the machine to the cabinet base as follows:

1. Position the machine on the cabinet base, aligning it with the cash box and
cable holes (see Figure 2-2). Drill holes in the cabinet base to match four
rectangular mounting holes. The machine must be fixed in four positions,
two at the front and two at the back, to meet stability requirements.
2. Secure the machine to the base using either bolts and nuts or the special-
purpose fasteners provided.
Revision 01 2-5
115.5
103
157 74
96 44 118
192
261
3 APERTURES
52 SQUARE
MOUNTING BOLT
HOLES 8.7 FOR 157 157
5/16 BSW COACH
BOLT 158
268.2 268.2
FRONT FOOTPRINT
180 180
149
540
CLEARANCES
I0181
Note: all dimensions in milimetres
Figure 2-2 Machine Footprint and Clearances
2-6 Revision 01
2.3.2 Pre-start Connections, Checks and Power Up

Perform the following machine connections and checks:
1. Check that the Mechanical Meter Board is firmly seated in the top box or the
low boy meter cover and that the following printed circuit board assemblies
(PCBAs) are firmly seated in the logic cage:
Main Board
I/O Driver Board
LAB Board
Communications Configuration Board
Interface Board
Note
For accessing PCBAs, refer to the relevant chapter
in the Service Manual.
2. The machine power supply and monitor isolation transformer are set at the
factory for a mains input voltage of 240 V unless clearly labeled otherwise.
Should there be a need to change the mains input voltage setting:
WARNING
Make sure the machine is disconnected from
mains power before adjusting voltage settings.
CAUTION
Selecting the wrong power supply and/or monitor
isolation transformer voltage will cause
considerable damage to the power supply and/or
monitor transformer.
a. Set the voltage selector switch on the power supply for the correct
mains input voltage. The switch is mounted on the metal housing of
the power supply assembly, which is located at the back of the cabinet,
in the bottom right-hand corner.
b. Where a Ceronix monitor with a manually-switched isolation mains
input transformer is used, set the mains input switch on the
transformer to match the mains input voltage.
3. Make sure that the mains power switch is OFF. Connect the mains power
cable to the machine. The power cable may enter the cabinet either via a
hole in the base of the cabinet or via a hole in the rear wall of the cabinet. A
hole is provided in the base of the cabinet, near the cable entrance, to allow
a clamp to be fitted to the mains cable. The purpose of this clamp is to
prevent the mains power cable from being accidentally disconnected. This
clamp should be fitted if there is a reasonable risk that the mains power
cable may be accidentally disconnected.
Revision 01 2-7
WARNING
Visually check that the insulation of the mains
power cable is sound. Check that all machine
earth wires (green/yellow stripe or braid) and
screws that were moved during installation are
correctly attached.
4. Switch ON the machine and close the main door within 5 seconds (closing
the main door within 5 seconds will ensure that the monitor automatically
degausses correctly - refer step 5 below). The monitor and fluorescent
lighting system will then be powered up. The machine will perform self-
testing procedures for a few moments and any faults detected will be
highlighted by a message on the video screen. To fix detected faults, refer
to Fault Mode in the chapter Machine Modes.
5. If the monitor exhibits colour aberrations, this may be the result of magnetic
interference. Degaussing the monitor and cabinet, as described below, can
remove the colour aberrations.
a. Power down the machine and wait for a 30-minute period to elapse.
This time delay enables the monitor circuit varistors to cool
sufficiently and create enough energy to degauss both the monitor's
ferrous content and that of the cabinet.
b. Power up the machine and close the door within 5 seconds.
Automatic degaussing will now occur.
c. Should colour aberrations persist, use a degaussing wand to degauss
the monitor and cabinet. Follow the standard field procedures for
degaussing-wand usage.
2.3.3 Commissioning the Machine

Carry out the following procedures to commission the machine:
1. Check that the machine program type and variation match the customer
order. Use the Operator Mode menu and the options described in the
chapter Machine Modes.
2. Fill the hopper as described below:
Important Note
The procedure for filling the hopper is
dependent on house rules.
a. Obtain the correct number of coins required to fill the hopper (the
number is displayed in the Operator Mode Menu Operator Setup /
Selections Machine Options display).
b. Open the cabinet door (the machine will display a Main Door Open
message).
c. Place the coins into the hopper. Note that some jurisdictions may
require that the hopper be weighed and its weight recorded.
2-8 Revision 01
d. Close and lock the cabinet door; the machine will remain in fault
mode.
e. Insert the Jackpot Reset (Cancel Credit) key, turn it clockwise and
back again. This will clear the lockup Hopper Empty.
f. In some markets, the hopper refill amount must be recorded in the
machine memory. To do this, insert and turn the Audit Key to enter
Operator Mode, select Hopper Refill and press the appropriate buttons
to record the refill amount. Turn the Audit key back to return to Play
Mode.
g. Record the number of coins placed in the hopper in the refill register.
3. Where the Operator permits, monitor gameplay operations for any faults:
a. Ensure the machine accepts bank notes by inserting a valid bank note
(in good condition) and confirming that it is accepted and credited
correctly. If the bank note is not accepted on the second attempt,
repeat the test on another note. If the second bank note is also
rejected, refer to the Fault Finding section in the Bank Note Acceptor
chapter.
b. Ensure the machine accepts coins by checking that coins are accepted,
credited, and paid out correctly.
Retrieve bank notes and coins inserted during testing.
4. Machines operating on a network system may now be connected and
installed onto the network. For installation procedure refer to the manual for
the particular communications network used.
5. Request an Operator to record the values of the electromechanical meters
and the soft audit meters (as required by the applicable jurisdictional
authority).
6. Log installation data as specified by the appropriate jurisdictional
requirements.
The machine may now commence operation.
Revision 01 2-9
Notes
2-10 Revision 01
NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual Machine Modes
________Chapter 3________
Machine Modes
3.1 Modes of Operation ...................................................................... 3-3
3.2 Play Mode ...................................................................................... 3-4
3.2.1 Player Operation............................................................................. 3-5

3.2.2 Video Display.................................................................................. 3-7
3.2.3 Sounds and Tunes ......................................................................... 3-8
3.2.4 Pushbuttons.................................................................................... 3-8
3.2.5 Machine Self-Monitoring................................................................. 3-8
3.2.7 Electromechanical Meters ............................................................ 3-11
3.2.9 Audit Meters (Soft Meters)............................................................ 3-13
3.3 Operator Mode ............................................................................ 3-14
3.3.1 Machine Identification................................................................... 3-16

3.3.2 Accounting Information................................................................. 3-16
3.3.3 Diagnostic Information Menu........................................................ 3-21
3.3.4 Self Test Mode ............................................................................. 3-24
3.3.5 Operator Setup / Selections Mode ............................................... 3-30
3.3.6 Power Save Mode ........................................................................ 3-33
3.3.7 Current Lockup Menu Fault Mode ............................................. 3-33
Revision 01 3-1
Machine Modes NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual
List of Figures:
Figure 3-1 Format of Game Display ................................................................................3-4
Figure 3-2 Centre Line and Multi Line Combinations ......................................................3-7
Figure 3-3 Typical Pushbutton Layout .............................................................................3-8
Figure 3-4 Electromechanical Meters............................................................................3-12
Figure 3-5 Operator Mode Menu Displays - Structure...................................................3-15
List of Tables:
Table 3-1 Operator Mode Menu ....................................................................................3-14
Table 3-2 Machine Identification Display.......................................................................3-16
Table 3-3 Accounting Information Menu........................................................................3-17
Table 3-8 Accounting Information - Reset Periodic Meters...........................................3-19
Table 3-9 Accounting Information - Game Replay ........................................................3-19
Table 3-10 Accounting Information Meters of Last Game..........................................3-20
Table 3-11 Accounting Information - Game Statistics ...................................................3-20
Table 3-12 Accounting Information - Gamble Statistics ................................................3-21
Table 3-13 Diagnostic Information Menu.......................................................................3-21
Table 3-16 Diagnostic Information - Error Log ..............................................................3-23
Table 3-17 Diagnostic Information - Panic Log .............................................................3-23
Table 3-18 Diagnostic Information - Bill Acceptor Information ......................................3-24
Table 3-19 Self Test Mode Menu ..................................................................................3-24
Table 3-20 Self Test Mode Requirements.....................................................................3-25
Table 3-21 Self Test Mode - Lamp Test........................................................................3-25
Table 3-22 Self Test Mode - Coin Entry Test ................................................................3-26
Table 3-23 Self Test Mode - Hopper Test .....................................................................3-26
Table 3-24 Self Test Mode - Video Monitor Test Menu.................................................3-27
Table 3-25 Self Test Mode - Video Monitor Test Descriptions......................................3-27
Table 3-26 Self Test Mode - Sound Effects Test ..........................................................3-28
Table 3-27 Self Test Mode - Factory Test .....................................................................3-28
Table 3-28 Self Test Mode.- Combination Test.............................................................3-29
Table 3-29 Self Test Mode - Combination Test Result .................................................3-29
Table 3-30 Operator Setup / Selections Menu ..............................................................3-30
Table 3-31 Operator Setup/Selections - Machine Options Display ...............................3-31
Table 3-32 Operator Setup/Selections - Real Time Clock Setup ..................................3-32
Table 3-33 Operator Setup/Selections - Sound System Setup .....................................3-32
Table 3-34 Operator Setup/Selections - Reel Spin Speed Setup...................................3-32
Table 3-35 Operator Setup/Selections - Layout Setup ..................................................3-33
Table 3-36 Power Save Mode .......................................................................................3-33
Table 3-37 Fault Mode - Current Active Lockup Menu..................................................3-34
Table 3-38 Fault Mode - Current Active Lockup Help Screens .....................................3-35
3-2 Revision 01
3.1 Modes of Operation

Aristocrat designers have implemented software improvements in response to Mk
V Series I recommendations from customers, players and service technicians.
Improvements continue in development methods and in the range of features that
improve earnings capacity. Special attention has been given to features that make
the new MVP model more user friendly, more serviceable, and more reliable. In
addition, new data items have been added to meet jurisdictional requirements, and
a design priority maintains upward compatibility for Mk V Series I games.
Improvements include:
Operator Menu displays are shown in distinctive colours.
Four comment lines provide clearer guidance for players, operators and service
personnel line allocation is Game Comment, Game Feature, Player
Instruction, and Jurisdiction and Lockup Messages (see Figure 3-1).
A single set of game sounds has been selected from Mk V Series I and earlier
models.
Improved statistics include a Game Specific Statistics display to enable more
accurate game and player evaluations.
A new Quick Combination Test shows symbol positions without having to play
a game.
An expanded Game Replay display shows a 10-game history, and each game
has jurisdictional meter readings at game start, game end, and start-of-next
game.
Improved Panic Log displays include date/time stamping, source program error
location, and user-friendly error description.
Other improvements include a changed date/time format, enhanced Machine
Identification lines, a Quick Button Test, and new Diagnostic Meters.
The Mk4/5XR Gaming Machine is operated in two main modes, Play Mode and
Operator Mode. Play Mode permits gameplay while the machine is fully
operational and the cabinet door is closed. Operator Mode allows the operator to
configure the machine, view audit information, carry out machine tests, and reset
machine faults. Turning the Operator Key ON switches the machine from Play
Mode to Operator Mode.
Revision 01 3-3
3.2 Play Mode

The machine is in Play Mode when the cabinet door is closed and locked, and
there are no active lockup conditions. In Play Mode the machine:
shows game displays in readiness for player operation,
carries out gameplay,
continuously monitors and records play activities,
continuously runs the self-test processes,
displays comments and guidance for players, operators, and technicians.
Lockup comments Main Door Open

l
Win limit
I0187
Figure 3-1 Format of Game Display
Figure 3-1 shows the format of a game display. The symbols on the screen will
vary depending on the particular game software being used. The CREDIT, BET,
and WIN game meters show the number of credits applicable at the current stage
of the game. Machine conditions, including security alerts, are also displayed in a
message area. Messages displaying maximum win amounts may also appear on
the screen.
Lockup messages are listed in Fault Mode - Current Lockup Menu.
In Play Mode the machine operates with full security features. For example, the
machine monitors operations and alerts operators should malfunction or tampering
occur. Electronic meters and electromechanical meters (if fitted) record details of
gameplay and machine operations in Play Mode.
3-4 Revision 01
Options
Besides being able to alter machine controls to suit house preferences, the
Mk4/5XR machine provides menu controls for setting important game and player
preferences, including:
Game percentage,
Base credit value (a game credit), machine token amount for coin entry, and
acceptable bill ($ note) denominations,
Links to house and stand-alone progressives in various levels, if fitted.
Hopper coin-collect limit,
Game gamble option,
Volume settings for sounds and tunes.
Refer to Operator Setup/Selection Mode.
Note
Jurisdictional requirements must be followed
when configuring machines.
3.2.1 Player Operation

When the machine is switched on and the cabinet door is closed and locked, the
fluorescent tubes light up and the machine automatically initiates a self-test. If no
faults are detected, gameplay may begin.
Spinning Reel Games

When a player inserts a coin or note, the machine either accepts or rejects the
currency. If the machine accepts the currency, it increments the CREDIT meter on
the game video display by the number of credits. The mid trim pushbuttons
become active and flash. The player may now either insert more currency or press
one of the pushbuttons to play the game. The player selects the number of credits
to bet and this number is shown on the BET meter on the video display. A beep
sound is heard when any of the BET playbuttons is pressed.
The reels then start to spin and after a short interval come to rest. When the
spinning reels stop, the line combinations are evaluated. If the result is a winning
combination, a selected win tune is played. The video display shows the number
of credits won in the WIN meter.
Gamble feature
Some games incorporate a win-gamble feature that provide players with the
chance to double their WIN amount. This feature is initiated by pressing the
GAMBLE pushbutton. The GAMBLE feature may be selected a maximum of 5
times in succession. If players do not wish to gamble their WIN, they may press
the TAKE WIN pushbutton. Pressing TAKE WIN adds the WIN to the CREDIT
meter.
Revision 01 3-5
Payout
Due to the limit on the number of coins that can be held in the hopper, as well as
other payout considerations, there is a limit to the number of coins that the
machine can pay out. This is called the Collect Limit and is set via the Operator
Mode Menu Operator Setup/Selections Machine Options screen display.
A player can collect coins up to the Collect Limit amount by pressing the
COLLECT pushbutton. When the COLLECT button is pressed, the machine
prevents functions such as gameplay and entry of currency until the hopper has
dispensed the coins into the coin tray. The hopper photo-optic detector counts the
coins being dispensed. The CREDIT meter decrements to zero.
When a player presses the COLLECT pushbutton and the value of the game
credits is greater than the Collect Limit:
the message Call attendant - Cancel Credit $##/## is displayed ($##.## is
the value of credits to be paid out).
the attendant hand pays the value of the credits and then resets the machine
by turning the Jackpot Key ON then OFF.
the message Credits paid out $##.## is displayed on the screen.
the CANCEL CREDIT electronic meters and electromechanical meters
record the number of credits paid out.
the game CREDIT on the screen are reset to zero.
Reserve
Pressing the RESERVE pushbutton displays the message MACHINE RESERVED
on the screen. This allows players to reserve a machine for a short period.
Types of Games
Machines generally have one of three game types: multiplier, multiline, and
multiline-multiplier (see Figure 3-2).
Multiplier - A multiplier game allows a player to gamble more than one credit
per game on a single winning line. Each additional credit gambled generally
multiplies the value of the prize by the value of the credits staked.
Multiline - A multiline game allows a player to specify up to 20 lines on which to
bet for a winning combination. Up to 25 credits can be bet on each line. The win
total is calculated by adding each of the win lines.
3-6 Revision 01
4 4
2 2
1 1 1 1
3 3
5 5
10 10 12 12
6 6
8 8 14 14
15 15
9 9
7 7
11 11
13 13
18 18
16 16
20 20
17 17
19 19
I0017
Figure 3-2 Centre Line and Multi Line Combinations
3.2.2 Video Display

The video display unit provides high-resolution graphics based on 256 colours.
The unit is able to display attractive game illustrations and animations, as well as
player messages, operator menus and information displays.
The simulated spinning reels take up most of the screen area. The area at the top
of the screen displays CREDIT, BET, and WIN information, as well as the coin
denomination accepted. Between these two areas is the top message display area.
The monitor may be fitted with a touchscreen that enables games to be played by
touching designated areas of the screen.
Revision 01 3-7
3.2.3 Sounds and Tunes

Sounds and tunes are used, in combination with the graphics and animation, to
increase game appeal.
Different sounds are played to signify various machine conditions, such as alarm,
reel spin/stop, win, lose, double-up win, jackpot bell, coins entering machine, and
coins falling to coin tray. Each game has its own specific sounds and tunes.
The volume of the sound system can be adjusted in the Sound System Setup
menu.
3.2.4 Pushbuttons
A typical layout of the pushbuttons is shown below. The pushbuttons are labelled
and have the following functions: COLLECT, RESERVE, PLAY 1/3/5/7/9
LINES, (including RED and BLACK which refer to features of the gamble
option), BET 1/2/3/5/10 CREDITS, TAKE WIN and GAMBLE.
Each pushbutton has a lamp behind it that may either be lit, unlit, flashing, or
flashing at double speed, depending on the circumstances and the machine mode.
BET 1 BET 2 BET 3 BET 5 BET 10

COLLECT CREDIT CREDITS CREDITS CREDITS CREDITS
PER LINE PER LINE PER LINE PER LINE PER LINE
PLAY 1 PLAY 9
LINE PLAY 3 PLAY 5 PLAY 7 LINES TAKE
SERVICE GAMBLE
LINES LINES LINES WIN
RED BLACK
NOTE
I0020
Figure 3-3 Typical Pushbutton Layout
3.2.5 Machine Self-Monitoring

Self-test
When the machine is switched on, it automatically initiates a self-test that
continues in the background as long as the machine is in play mode. During the
self-test, the machine checks the electronic meter data held in computer memory
and also carries out an audit calculation using essential meter counts.
This self-audit calculation is defined by the formula:
(CASH IN + WINS = CASH OUT + CANCELLED CREDITS + TURNOVER + CURRENT GAME CREDITS).
The memory holds up to three copies of the electronic meter data, METER SET 1,
METER SET 2 and METER SET 3. If the data in one meter set does not match
that in the other two sets, the data of the two identical sets overwrites the single
set.
3-8 Revision 01
Security
When the machine is in play mode, it continuously operates the following security
features:
Coin Validator Once in the validator, the coin passes a sensor coil that detects its
diameter, thickness, and magnetic properties. Invalid coins are diverted to the
coin tray. For valid coins, a CSENSE output signal is generated and the coins are
directed past the validator's internal photo-optic detector and on to the coin accept
chute.
Coins passing the opto detector generate a CCREDIT output signal. For a valid
coin to register, a CSENSE pulse must be followed by a CCREDIT pulse. If this
condition is not met, a CERROR output signal is generated. This signal indicates
a Yo-Yo or a coin blockage condition depending on the width of the pulse. On
receiving a CERROR signal, the machine locks up, the error message Yoyo or
Coin Optic Fault is displayed on the screen, and the appropriate audit meter is
incremented. See Section 3.3.7, Fault Mode - Current Lockup Menu.
The position of the coin diverter determines whether accepted coins are directed to
the hopper or the cash box. A photo-optic detector is used to monitor the position
of the diverter and generates the output signal CDIVPOS.
The Coin Handling Interface on the I/O Driver Board converts the output signals
CCREDIT, CSENSE, CERROR and CDIVPOS into the form required by the
Main Board. The machine software then analyses these signals to determine the
validity of inserted coins and to check for fault conditions.
If the inserted coin is valid, the appropriate credits are registered in the game
CREDIT display and gameplay may take place. The audit meters CASH IN and
CREDIT in the accounting menu and the electromechanical meter CASH IN are
incremented accordingly.
Note that the game display shows accumulations and totals in credits, whereas
the electronic meters accumulate in dollars and cents. The electromechanical
meters CASH IN and CASH OUT accumulate in dollars and cents but only
display to the whole dollar the cents not displayed continue in the
accumulation.
All coins go to the hopper until the coins in the hopper reach the level detector
probe, indicating that the hopper is full. At this stage, coins are diverted to the
cash box.
The machine software monitors the signals from the Coin Handling Interface and
unusual conditions and faults are registered by machine lockup, video messages
and increments in the appropriate audit meters diagnostic menus. These fault
conditions are COIN ACCEPTOR FAULT, COIN OPTIC FAULT and COIN
DIVERTER FAULT.
If the machine software indicates that coins intended for the hopper are diverted to
the cash box, or vice versa, the CASH BOX INSTEAD HOPPER or HOPPER
INSTEAD CASH BOX audit meters in the diagnostic menus are incremented.
These totals allow adjustment and balancing of the hopper and cash box
collections.
Revision 01 3-9
Hopper. If the hopper is empty and the player is in credit and presses the
COLLECT pushbutton, the machine locks up and displays a Hopper Empty
message and the audit meter HOPPER EMPTY increments. The hopper is refilled
in these circumstances according to house rules, after which gameplay may
resume.
During a payout, the hopper disc rotates and passes coins onto the coin runner
where they are counted by the hopper photo-optic detector. After passing the
detector, they are deposited in the coin tray for the player to collect. Also:
the COINS OUT electromechanical meter and the CASH OUT audit meter
are incremented by the amount paid out.
the game CREDIT on the screen and the CREDIT audit meter are
decremented by the amount paid out.
a payout message is displayed on the screen showing the value paid out.
The machine monitors the hopper operation and the photo optic detector checks
the coins exiting the hopper. Unusual conditions and faults are registered by
increments in the Diagnostic Meters, video messages and machine lockups. These
fault conditions are ILLEGAL COIN OUT, HOPPER EMPTY, HOPPER
JAMMED, and HOPPER DISCONNECTED.
Bank Note Acceptor The Bank Note Acceptor consists of an optical scanning
unit and a bill stacker contained in a high-security housing. During operation, the
acceptor registers acceptances and rejections. Notes accepted increment the
CASH IN electronic meter and electromechanical meter. Detailed information is
recorded in the Bank Note Acceptor meters, which may be accessed from
Operator Mode / Accounting Information Menu. These meters record the value
and quantity of each note accepted. A record is also kept of the last five notes
accepted.
The machine monitors the bank note acceptor operation and unusual conditions
and faults are registered by increments in the Diagnostic Meters, and by display
messages and machine lockups. The lockups and video messages are NOTE
ACCEPTOR ERROR and NOTE ACCEPTOR OUT OF SERVICE. Should the
bank note stacker door be open, the alarm sounds and the message NOTE
STACKER REMOVED is displayed. A lockup occurs should the bank note
acceptor stacker become full. The lockup description and video message is NOTE
ACCEPTOR FULL.
The Machine Options menu enables the bank note acceptor to be configured ON
or OFF and to recognise specific note denominations.
Door Security
Up to eight mechanical and eight optical security switches may be used to monitor
various door accesses.
If a door fitted with a security switch is opened while the machine is powered:
3-10 Revision 01
a DOOR OPEN message is displayed on the screen, specifying which door

is open.
the alarm sound is heard.
the machine locks up, suspending gameplay.
the appropriate audit meter DOOR ACCESSES in the Diagnostic menus is
incremented.
The condition is reset by closing the appropriate door and turning the Jackpot
Reset (Cancel Credit) key clockwise and back again.
The message DOOR MISMATCH MAIN error indicates a machine fault where
the mechanical and the optical door security switches do not agree on the door
open status. This condition is cleared by correcting a faulty or poorly aligned
mechanical door switch.
The security signals are typically distributed as follows:
Security Mechanical Optical
0 Logic cage Main door
1 Top box ----
2 Mechanical meters ----
3 ----- ----
4 Main door ----
5 Bank note stacker ----
6 ----- ----
7 ----- -----
Note: The actual distribution and use of security switches will depend on the individual machine configuration.
3.2.7 Electromechanical Meters

The machine is fitted with electromechanical meters (see Figure 34). These
meters form part of the comprehensive security system by recording the results of
machine operations.
Note
The machine will not function if the hard
meters are not connected.
The eight electromechanical meters, located at the bottom of the top box, provide
a permanent and cumulative record of essential counts. Low boy models locate
the hard meters in the electro-mechanical box which sits on top of the cabinet
Revision 01 3-11
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
TURNOVER TOTAL WINS CASH BOX CANCEL CREDIT
Top Box 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
MONEY IN MONEY OUT CASH IN CASH OUT
Top Trim
Electromechanical
Meters
Monitor
I0191
Figure 3-4 Electromechanical Meters
Note
On delivery of a machine, the meters are not
set to zero because of factory tests. Record
the initial meter values before using the
machine.
These meters are non-resettable and are cumulative for the life of the meter. They
provide a permanent cumulative record of:
1. TURNOVER: the total of all money bet in all games played.
2. TOTAL WINS: the total number of credits, excluding progressive jackpots,
that have been won in all games played.
3. CASH BOX: the dollar value sum of coins that have dropped into the cash
box via the coin-in chute plus notes into the stacker.
4. CANCEL CREDIT: the total value of credits that have been hand paid
through the cancelled credits procedure.
5. MONEY IN: the value of all money that has been electronically transferred
into the EGM from the Centralised Cash Control Equipment (CCCE) (if
used).
6. MONEY OUT: the value of all money that has been electronically
transferred from the EGM to the Centralised Cash Control Equipment
(CCCE) (if used).
7. CASH IN: the total number of credits inserted in the bill acceptor and the
coin entry device (whole dollars display and dollars and cents accumulate).
8. CASH OUT: the total number of credits paid out in coin from the hopper
(whole dollars display and dollars and cents accumulate).
3-12 Revision 01
Meter Security
The electromechanical meters are monitored for abnormal conditions, meters cage
accesses and meter disconnection. Detection of conditions is actioned as follows:
game play is suspended,
the alarm sound is heard,
an appropriate lockup and operator message is actioned, being selected
from: METERS FAULTY, METERS CAGE OPEN, METERS
DISCONNECTED.
the appropriate electronic meter increments, being selected from: METERS
FAULTY, METERS CAGE OPEN, and METERS DISCONNECTED.
The condition is reset when the machine condition is cleared, the lockup is
removed, and the door is closed. Refer to Table 3-37 for a listing of the Current
Lockups.
3.2.9 Audit Meters (Soft Meters)

The audit meters (soft meters) record a variety of details relating to machine
operation, gameplay and player interaction, as well as a variety of statistical
counts, security events and past games. Players have the assurance that there is a
record kept of recent win or pay situations.
When the machine is switched on, it automatically initiates a self-test that
continues in the background as long as the machine is in play mode. During the
self-test, the machine checks the audit meter data held in memory.
Some jurisdictions require audit metering data to be stored in triplicate in three
separate battery-backed RAM chips. In the case of a meter malfunction, where
none of the meters sets match, the machine displays the error message 3 WAY
MEMORY ERROR and the machine locks up. This message indicates a serious
machine malfunction.
Failure in the self audit calculation also causes a machine lockup with the message
SELF AUDIT ERROR being displayed.
Resetting Metering and Self Audit Errors

To clear a metering or self audit error, the memory fault must be rectified and
correct operations re-established with all corrupted meters set to zero. The lockup
is removed by turning the Operator Key ON, following the on-screen guidance,
and then turning the Operator Key OFF to return to gameplay. After recovering
from a memory error, some electronic meters are reset to zero. The information
held in these electronic meters includes:
Accounting Information Menu items (Jurisdictional, Periodic, Game Replay,
Game / Gamble / Collect Statistics).
Diagnostic Information Menu items (Diagnostic, Error Log, Panic Log,
Bank Note Acceptor Information).
Operator Setup / Selections Menu items (Machine Options, Real Time
Clock Setup, Sound System Setup, Reel Spin Speed Setup, Layout Setup,).
Revision 01 3-13
3.3 Operator Mode

Operator Mode addresses the jurisdictional and accounting/management
information requirements, allows the machine configuration to be changed, and
facilitates machine testing and fault finding. The Operator Mode Menu is shown
below.
Table 3-1 Operator Mode Menu
OPERATOR MODE MENU

1 Machine Identification
2 Accounting Information
3 Diagnostic Information
4 Self Test Mode
5 Operator Setup / Selections
6 Power Save Mode
7 Current Lockup
Play 1 Line - Press to select next item

Play 10 Lines - Press to select previous item
Play 10 Lines - Press to choose selected item
Operator Key - Turn off to exit
Main Door is currently opened (See Note 1)
Instructions are given on each screen to guide the operator through the various
menus and options available. Any active lockups are indicated by a flashing
message at the bottom of the screen.
Note
The following Operator Mode Menus are
based on the game Penguin Pays. The
menu options, screen displays and
instructions may vary slightly with other
games.
The structure of the information displays is shown in the following diagram.
3-14 Revision 01
Operator Mode Menu
Operator Mode Menu Displays - Structure
1. Machine Identification Machine
2. Accounting Information Identification
3. Diagnostic Information
Revision 01
4. Self Test Mode
5. Operator Setup/Selections
6. Power Save Mode
7. Current Lockup
Accounting
Diagnostic Information
Information Menu
Self Test Menu
Mode
Operator Jurisdic-
Power Save Menu
Setup / tional
Mode Selections Diagnostic Meters
NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual
Menu Meters
Lamp Periodic
Test Meters
Error
Log
Machine Button Reset of
Options Test Periodic
Panic Meters
Real Time Log
Coin
Clock Entry Previous Replay of
Setup Test Bill JursdctnlPrevious
Acceptor Meters Games
Sound Hopper Information
System Test
Setup Game
Ticket Statistics
Reel Spin Monitor Printer
Log
Current Active Speed Test
Setup Gamble
Lockup Menu Statistics
and Sound
Layout
Figure 3-5 Operator Mode Menu Displays - Structure

Effect
Help Displays Setup Test Collect
Statistics
Factory
Test
M5S2021B Combination
Tests
Quick
Combination
Test
Machine Modes
3-15
Printer
Test
3.3.1 Machine Identification

The Machine Identification information provides essential items, such as
Denomination, Tokenisation, and Percentage Return. Entry to the information
display is achieved by turning the Operator Key ON and selecting option 1 from
the Operator Mode Menu.
Table 3-2 Machine Identification Display
MACHINE IDENTIFICATION Explanation

Machine Identification (GMID): 332380 - Unique identification for machine.
Comms Protocol Version No.: 0001 - Communications protocol
identification required by LAB.
Manufacturer No.: 01 - Identification for Aristocrat.
Firmware Identification:
Game EPROM Id.: 0200001V - Identification for game EPROM.
Character EPROM Id.: Not fitted - Not used.
Other EPROM Id.: Not fitted - Not used.
Base Credit Value: $0.01 - The value of one credit.

Progressive Levels Supported: 0 - Progressive levels.
CCCE Port (P1): Not activated - Port for communicating with
subsidiary equipment.
CCCE Transfer Limit: $0 - Limit of transfer with Centralised
Cash Control equipment.
Hopper Limit: $50.00 - Maximum value of coins that can
be paid at one time by the hopper.
Theoretical PRT 87.17 - Theoretical percentage return.
Number 99 is the standard option.
Max Possible Win Value (MPWV): 500.00 - Maximum possible win in one
game, disregarding gamble wins.
Reserve - Press to return to previous menu

3.3.2 Accounting Information

The Accounting Information displays provide information for government
authorities, as well as additional financial and statistical details, including periodic
performance details, game replay, and game and gamble statistics. The
Accounting Information Menu is accessed by turning the Operator Key ON and
selecting option 2 from the Operator Mode Menu. Most of the information cannot
be altered although some details may be changed through Operator
Setup/Selections Machine Options.
3-16 Revision 01
Table 3-3 Accounting Information Menu
ACCOUNTING INFORMATION MENU

2.1 Jurisdictional Meters
2.2 Periodic Meters
2.3 Reset of Periodic Meters
2.4 Replay of Previous Games
2.5 Game Statistics
2.6 Gamble Statistics
2.7 Collect Statistics


Jurisdictional Meters
The Jurisdictional Meters provide the financial counts of machine activity. Items
include turnover, total wins and amounts inserted in the coin entry and the bill
acceptor devices.
Table 3-4 Accounting Information - Jurisdictional Meters - Screen 1
JURISDICTIONAL METERS Explanation

Meter Meter Meter - Each meter has three sets of recordings that
Set 1 Set 2 Set 3 are constantly compared. Differences cause a
metering error.
Turnover $75.00 $75.00 $75.00 - Value bet in all games played.
Total Win $15.00 $15.00 $15.00 - Value won in all games played.
Cash Box $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 - Value directed to the cash box and note
stacker.
Cancelled Credit $10.00 $10.00 $10.00 - Value paid other than by the hopper.
Money In $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 - Not used.
Money Out $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 - Not used.
Cash In $100.00 $100.00 $100.00 - Value of notes and coins inserted.
Cash Out $30.00 $30.00 $30.00 - Value paid out by the hopper.
Miscellaneous Accrual: $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 Not used
Credit: $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 Current amount of credit available to the
player
Play 1 Line - Press to display next meter screen

Reserve - Press to return to previous screen
Revision 01 3-17
Table 3-5 Accounting Information - Jurisdictional Meters - Screen 2
JURISDICTIONAL METERS
Meter Meter Meter
Set 1 Set 2 Set 3
Occurrence Meter 1 0 0 0 - Not used.
Occurrence Meter 3 0 0 0 - Not used
Occurrence Meter 4 0 0 0 - Not used
Power Up 0 0 0 Number of power ups
Games Played 0 0 0 Number of games played
Games Since Power Up 0 0 0 Games played since power up
Games Since Door Open 0 0 0 Games played since door open
Play 5 Lines - Press to display previous meter screen

Reserve - Press to return to previous menu -
Operator Key - Turn off to exit -
Periodic Meters
The Periodic Meters screens contain the same information items as the
Jurisdictional Meters, but the values held usually relate only to a specified period
determined by the club management. To reset the periodic meters, there must be
no credits on the screen.
Table 3-6 Accounting Information - Periodic Meters - Screen 1
PERIODIC METERS Explanation
Meter Meter Meter - Periodic meters show values since

Set 1 Set 2 Set 3 the last time the periodic meters were
reset.
Cash Box $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 - Value directed to the cash box and
note stacker.
Money In $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 - Not used.
Money Out $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 - Not used.
Cash In $100.00 $100.00 $100.00 - Value inserted in bill acceptor and
coin entry devices.
Cash Out $30.00 $30.00 $30.00 - Value paid by the hopper.
Miscellaneous Accrual: $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 Not used
Play 1 Lines - Press to display next meter screen

3-18 Revision 01
Table 3-7 Accounting Information - Periodic Meters - Screen 2
PERIODIC METERS
Meter Set Meter Set Meter Set

1 2 3
Occurrence Meter 3 0 0 0 Not used
Occurrence Meter 4 0 0 0 Not used

Reserve - Press to return to previous menu -
Operator Key - Turn off to exit -
Table 3-8 Accounting Information - Reset Periodic Meters
RESET PERIODIC METERS Explanation
Play 1 Line Press to reset periodic meters This will appear only when there are
zero credits registered

Game Replay
The Game Replay screen allows the operator to replay previous games which
includes viewing the Credit, Bet, and Win information for those games. The
jurisidictional meters for the last two games can also be viewed.
Table 3-9 Accounting Information - Game Replay
REPLAY OF PREVIOUS GAMES Explanation

-
No. of games available to replay 36 The system can replay the last 36 games
Replay Game Number 2 Replay Game will replay one of the 36 games in full
Play 1 Line - Press to select next game

Play 5 Lines - Press to select previous game
Play 10 Lines - Press to replay selected game
Play 15 Lines Press for meters of last game Displays jurisdictional meters for the last two games
Reserve: - Press to return to previous menu
Revision 01 3-19
Table 3-10 Accounting Information Meters of Last Game
Jurisdictional Meters of Last Game Played Explanation

Start of End of Start of - Select the REPLAY GAME option to
Game Game next see the game replayed. The VIEW
Game GAME METERS option shows the
states of the game meters for the game
replayed.
Cash Box $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 - Value directed to the cash box.
Money In $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 Not used.
Money Out $0.00 $0.00 $0.00 Not used.
Cash In $100.00 $101.00 $100.00 - Value inserted in bill acceptor and coin
entry devices.
Cash Out $30.00 $30.00 $30.00 - Value paid by the hopper.
Miscellaneous Accrual: 0 0 0 Not used
Credit: $1.00 0 $1.00 Current amount of credit available to the
player
Occurrence Meter 1 0 0 0
Power Up 0 0 0 Games since event
Games Played 0 0 0 Games since event
Games Since Power Up 0 0 0 Games since event
Games Since Door Up 0 0 0 Games since event
Play 1 Line - Press for meters of the 2nd last game

Game Statistics
This screen provides statistics on Games Played and Money Won for each Line
and Bet combination.
Table 3-11 Accounting Information - Game Statistics
GAME STATISTICS Explanation
Bet Lines Games Money Bet Lines Games Money - Statistics for each Bet and
Played Won Played Won Line.
1 1 215 $21.50 2 1 50 $10.00

1 5 2 5
1 10 2 10
1 15 56 $28.00 2 15 5 $5.00
1 20 2 205
(Continues for each Bet and Line amount)

3-20 Revision 01
Gamble Statistics
This screen provides statistics on the number of times Gamble or Take Win was
selected for different Win amounts.
Table 3-12 Accounting Information - Gamble Statistics
GAMBLE STATISTICS Explanation
Win Amount Gambled Take Win Chosen Won - Statistics for Gamble and
Take Win options
1 - 4 0 4 Red Red
5 - 9 0 1 1
10 - 19 0 Black Black
20 - 29 0 1 0
30 - 49 0 Heart Heart
50 - 9 0 3 8 4
100 - 199 0 Diamond Diamond
200 - 499 0 19 6
500 - 999 0 Spade Spade
1000 - 1999 0 37 11
2000 - 4999 0 Club Club
5000 + 0 8 0
Reserve: - Press to return to previous menu

3.3.3 Diagnostic Information Menu

The Diagnostic Information Menu items provide a record of abnormal operational
events, such as device faults, security door accesses, and operational logs. The
menu is accessed by turning the Operator Key ON and selecting option 3 from the
Operator Mode Menu.
Table 3-13 Diagnostic Information Menu
DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION MENU
3.1 Diagnostic Meters

3.2 Error Log
3.3 Panic Log
3.4 Bill Acceptor Information
3.5 Bill Acceptor Log

Operator Key - Turn off to exit.
Revision 01 3-21
Table 3-14 Diagnostic Information - Diagnostic Meters - Screen 1
DIAGNOSTIC METERS Explanation
Coin Optics Faults 0 - Increments if the software detects that the validator
opto detector is blocked, or an inexplicable set of
changes occur in the opto detector.
Coin Acceptor Faults 0 - Increments if a coin acceptor fault is detected.
Coin Diverter Faults 0 - Increments after five consecutive instances of coins
going to hopper instead of cash box, or to cash box
instead of hopper.
Yoyo Attempts 116 - Increments when the coin validator indicates a coin
travelling in the upward direction.
Main Door Accesses 0 - Increments when the main door is opened.
Cash Box Accesses 0 - Increments when the cash box door is opened.
Logic Accesses 0 - Increments when the logic security cage is opened.
Top Box Accesses 0 - Increments when the top box is opened.
Bill Acceptor Accesses 0 - Increments when the bill acceptor door is opened.
Illegal Coin Out 0 - Increments when the machine is not in hopper collect,
but a coin passes the hopper optic.
Hopper Empty 0 - Increments when hopper is in hopper collect and two
consecutive 4-second attempts to pay out a coin fail.
Hopper Jammed 0 - Increments when the hopper optic is blocked for more
than 200 ms.
Hopper Disconnected 0 - Increments when hopper is disconnected (checked
every second).
Cash Box Instead Hopper $0.00 - Increments when coins intended for the hopper are
diverted to the cash box.
Hopper Instead Cash Box $0.00 - Increments when coins intended for the cash box are
diverted to the hopper.
Play 1 Lines - Press to display next meter screen
Table 3-15 Diagnostic Information - Diagnostic Meters - Screen 2
DIAGNOSTIC METERS
Mechanical Meters Disc: 0 - Increments if meters are disconnected.
Mechanical Meters Faults: 0 - Increments if a short circuit is detected
in the meters.
Mechanical Meters Cage Accesses: 0 - Increments if the meter security cage is
opened.
Printer Faults: 0
Printer Disconnected 0
Paper Deplated Faults 0
Port P1 Failures: 0
Port P2 Failures: 0
Port P3 Failures: 0
Port P4 Failures: 0
Port P5 Failures: 0
Port P6 Failures: 0

3-22 Revision 01
Error Log Display

This screen display shows the date, time, and type of the most recent error
messages. The log holds information on the last one hundred errors.
Table 3-16 Diagnostic Information - Error Log
ERROR LOG Explanation

Event number 0 is the most
recent event and 99 is the oldest.
Event # Time Error Type The log registers lockup events
only
0 26-Mar-0 9.48 Machine power Fail
1 26-Mar-0 9.48 Main Door Open
3 26-Mar-0 9.14 Bill Stacker Removed
4 26-Mar-0 9.13 Bill Acceptor Door Open
5 26-Mar-0 9.10 Hopper Disconnected
7
8
9
Play 1 Line - Press to scroll forward by one line
Play 5 Lines- Press to scroll backward by one line
Play 10 Lines- Press to scroll forward by one page
Play 15 Lines- Press to scroll backward by one page
Operator Key - Turn of to exit
Panic Log Display

Information is recorded in this log whenever a critical error occurs from which the
machine cannot recover.
Table 3-17 Diagnostic Information - Panic Log
PANIC LOG Explanation

User FIQ SVC SVC -
R13 001fffec R8 0c000110 R2 0000002 R9 000128d0
R14 2340119c R9 00084100 R3 0000000 R10 ffffffea
R10 R4 R11
IRQ R11 R5 R12 Data items are program
R13 001fffb0 R12 R6 R13 counter, source module,
R14 R13 R7 R14
$14 R8 R15
Reserve - Press to return to previous menu and error description

Operator Key - Turn of to exit
Information is recorded in this log whenever a critical error occurs from which the
machine cannot recover.
Revision 01 3-23
Bank Note Acceptor Information

This screen provides a record of the number of notes of each denomination
received, the last five notes accepted, and the total value of notes received.
Table 3-18 Diagnostic Information - Bill Acceptor Information
BILL ACCEPTOR INFORMATION Explanation
Number of Notes Received - Information on notes input.
$ 1 Notes Received:
$ 5 Notes Received: 7
$ 20 Notes Received:
$ 100 Notes Received:
TOTAL VALUE OF NOTES RECEIVED $713.50

TOTAL NUMBER OF NOTES RECEIVED 77
LAST FIVE NOTES RECEIVED

Last: $5
Second Last: $10
Third Last: $10
Fourth Last: $50
Fifth Last: $50

3.3.4 Self Test Mode

Self Test Mode addresses the repair and maintenance tasks for the MVP machine.
The items on the Self Test Mode Menu are designed to test various machine
components and features
This mode can only be accessed when player credits are zero, the main door is
open, and no other lockups are active.
The Self Test Mode Menu is accessed by first opening the main door, turning the
Operator Key ON, and selecting option 4 from the Operator Mode Menu.
Table 3-19 Self Test Mode Menu
SELF TEST MODE MENU
4.1 Lamp Test 4.5 Sound Effect Test

4.2 Coin Entry Test 4.6 Factory Test
4.3 Hopper Test 4.7 Combination Test
4.4 Monitor Test

3-24 Revision 01
Table 3-20 Self Test Mode Requirements
SELF TEST MODE
Entry to this mode is not permitted unless:
(a) Credit is zero

(b) Main door is open
(c) No other lockups active

Lamp Test
This screen allows the operator to test the pushbutton lamps, animation lamps and
light tower lamps. The state of individual lamps can be set to either on, off,
flashing slow, or flashing fast. The operator can then observe the lamps to verify
correct operation.
Table 3-21 Self Test Mode - Lamp Test
LAMP TEST Explanation

- Tests lamps
Light Tower Animation Player Key
Lamp # Lamp # Lamp #
1 2 3 4
1 9 1 9 All
Win Line 2 10 2 10
Lamp # 3 11 3 11
1 2 3 4 5 4 12 4 12
5 13 5 13
Play Line 6 14 6 14
Lamp # 7 15 7 15
1 2 3 4 5 8 16 8 16
Current Function: ON OFF FLASH SLOW FLASH FAST
Play 1 Line - Press to select next lamp

Play 5 Lines - Press to select previous lamp
Play 15 Lines Press to select function (on/off/flash)
Service- Press to return to previous menu
Revision 01 3-25
Coin Entry Test

This screen allows the operator to test the coin entry devices. The operator
selects the state of the coin validator and coin diverter, then enters coins and
observes the changes in the display readings.
Table 3-22 Self Test Mode - Coin Entry Test
TEST MODE - COIN ENTRY TEST Explanation

- Tests for coin entry devices. Choose
States, enter coins, and observe
changes in display readings.
COIN ENTRY
Reject State: Chip Tray Changes to Chip Tray or Internal
Validator O/P: Inactive
Optic A: Unblocked
Optic B: Unblocked
CASH BOX
Diverter state: Cash Box Changes to Cash Box or Hopper
Optic A: Not Used
Optic B: Unblocked
MESSAGE
Play 1 Line - Press to change reject state Play 1 Line not displayed until main
Play 5 Lines - Press to change diverter state door fully opened
Hopper Test
In this test, the Collect button is pressed to activate a hopper payout of 10 coins.
The door must then be closed and the 10 coins reinserted. Any error messages
will be displayed on the screen.
Table 3-23 Self Test Mode - Hopper Test
TEST MODE - HOPPER TEST Explanation

- Test attempts to pay 10 coins from the
hopper after pressing Collect Key.
Hopper Test Payout: 0
Coins Reinserted: 0 Door must be closed and the 10 coins

reinserted.
Last Hopper Event: None - Any error messages will be displayed on

screen.
Collect Key - Press to activate payout

Reserve - Press to return to previous menu Exit only possible after coins paid and
reinserted.
If Payout Limit is $0.0, test is not operable
3-26 Revision 01
Video Monitor Test

This screen allows a range of tests to be conducted on the video monitor. The
parameters checked include picture alignment, distortion, and colour purity. The
operator inspects the display to decide whether the tests are passed or failed.
Table 3-24 Self Test Mode - Video Monitor Test Menu
VIDEO MONITOR TESTS MENU Explanation

- Tests the video monitor parameters
3.4.1 Screen Frame 3.4.8 Vertical Regularity
3.4.2 Tilt 3.4.9 Horizontal Regularity
3.4.3 Horizontal Curvature 3.4.10 Red Colour Purity
3.4.4 Vertical Curvature 3.4.11 Green Colour Purity
3.4.5 Geometrical Linearity 3.4.12 Blue Colour Purity
3.4.6 Barrel Distortion 3.4.13 Basic Colours
3.4.7 Screen Regulation 3.4.14 Mode Colours
Play 1 Line - Press to select next test

Play 5 Lines - Press to select previous test
Play 10 Lines Press to choose selected test
Service - Press to return to previous menu
Press Any Button to complete chosen test
Table 3-25 Self Test Mode - Video Monitor Test Descriptions
SELF TEST MODE - VIDEO MONITOR TEST DESCRIPTIONS

TEST DESCRIPTION
-
Colour Balance Test - Tests the shading of primary colours to confirm the adjustment of colours
Grey Scale Test - Tests the colour guns are equal in intensity
12.5% White Screen Test - Displays a slightly lighter colour than black
Grid Linearity Test - Displays a series of horizontal and vertical lines on the same screen
Magenta Grid Linearity Test - Displays a series of horizontal and vertical lines on the same screen using
magenta colour
Basic Colours Test - Displays four coloured rectangles - red, green, blue, white
Mode Colours Test - Displays the full range of 256 colours available
Screen Regulation Test - Displays a flashing white box
Red Colour Purity Test - Activates all red pixels
Green Colour Purity Test - Activates all green pixels
Blue Colour Purity Test - Activates all blue pixels
Black Colour Purity Test - Activates all black pixels
White Colour Purity Test - Activates all white pixels
Revision 01 3-27
Sound Effect Test

This screen allows the operator to change the volume of the sound system.
Table 3-26 Self Test Mode - Sound Effects Test
TEST MODE - SOUND SYSTEM TEST Explanation

- Permits change to volume settings
except alarm sound. Plays the range
of machine sounds. Changes can be
made as test is in progress.
IIIIIIIIIII
Play 1 Line - Press to increase volume

Play 5 Lines - Press to decrease volume
Play 10 Lines - Press to play machine tunes
Factory Test
The Factory Test option is for use by Aristocrat personnel The option conducts
several tests simultaneously, including coin entry,, coin diverter, door switch,
video monitor tests, and sound system tests. At the end, the tests will
automatically resume press any key to discontinue the tests. Failed tests are
displayed on the screen.
Table 3-27 Self Test Mode - Factory Test
FACTORY TEST Explanation

- This menu is for Aristocrat personnel
only
Cycle Count: 1
Test Description: Coin Entry Validator Test
Time: Error Type:

02:42:49 Error in Door Switch Test
Play 1 Line - Press to start Factory Test

Service - Press to return to previous menu
3-28 Revision 01
Combination Test
The Combination Test enables the reel symbols to be seen and the combination
positions checked. After selecting a set of finishing positions as a request target
(by pressing the pushbuttons, Play 1 Line, Play 5 Lines, Play 10 Lines), the test is
activated by pressing the Play 15 Lines pushbutton, then pressing any one of the
Play Lines. The resultant game display must match the requested reel positions.
A check of the graphic animations and sound displays, applicable to any winning
combination on display, can be carried out.
Table 3-28 Self Test Mode.- Combination Test
SELF TEST MODE - COMBINATION TEST

KEY
Play 1 Line Play 5 Lines Play 10 Lines Play 7 Lines Reserve
Next Reel Step Forward Step Backward Go Exit
10 1 1 8 1
Table 3-29 Self Test Mode - Combination Test Result

EXPLANATION
- Result of combination
test, after choosing reel-
finishing positions.
Revision 01 3-29
3.3.5 Operator Setup / Selections Mode

The Operator Setup / Selections Menu enables the various machine options to be
set to individual house preferences. The settings can be viewed and changed by
pressing the appropriate buttons.
This option is only available when player credits are zero, the main door is open,
and no other lockups are active.
Entry to this menu is achieved by turning the Operator Key ON and selecting
option 5 from the Operator Mode Menu.
Table 3-30 Operator Setup / Selections Menu
OPERATOR SETUP / SELECTIONS MENU

5.1 Machine Options
5.2 Real Time Clock Setup
5.3 Sound System Setup
5.4 Reel Spin Speed Setup
5.5 Layout Setup

Machine Options
Note
Approval from the jurisdictional authority is required
before the items in the Machine Options screen can be
changed.
The security logic cage must be open to save changes to machine options.
3-30 Revision 01
Table 3-31 Operator Setup/Selections - Machine Options Display
MACHINE OPTIONS
IMPORTANT: These items can only be changed after consulting with the LAB.
(The security logic cage must be open to save changes to machine options)
MACHINE ID 332280 Accept $1 Bills NO

BASE CREDIT VALUE $0.01 Accept $5 Bills YES
TOKEN VALUE $1.00 Accept $10 Bills YES
PERCENTAGE VARIATION 99 (87.17 %) Accept $20 Bills YES
ENABLE CCCE YES Accept $50 Bills YES
COLLECT LIMIT $50.00 Accept $100 Bills YES
HOPPER REFILL $50.00 ENABLE BILL ACCEPTOR YES
GAMBLE YES
HOPPER / PRINTER SELECT HOPPER
VENUE NAME AAAAAAAA
SEIRAL NUMBER 123456789012
HOUSE NUMBER
Play 5 Lines - Press to increment a digit

Play 7 Lines - Press to select another digit
Play 1 Line - Press to select next option
Play 3 Lines - Press to select previous option
Bet 1 Credit - Press to save new settings
Audit Key - Turn off to exit
Explanation of Terms
Machine ID: a number between 0 and 999999.

Base Credit Value: the value of one credit. Changing this value will reset the
jurisdictional meters.
Token Value: the value of the coin or token accepted by the machine. Must be
an integer multiple of the base credit value.
Percentage Variation 99: the Theoretical Percentage Return (TPR) variation;
Number 99 represents a TPR of 87.843%. Other variations may be selected.
Collect Limit: the maximum dollar value that can be paid from the hopper after
pressing COLLECT. If credit amount is greater, a Cancel Credit hand pay must
be made.
Hopper Refill: the amount of coins to be placed into the hopper when empty.
Gamble: enables/disables gamble option.
Enable Bill Acceptor: enables/disables the Bill Acceptor.
Accept $1-$100 Bills: allows the bill acceptor to be configured to accept specific
note denominations. The denominations selected will be illuminated on the
Bill Acceptor mid-trim display by the denomination back light.
Revision 01 3-31
Real Time Clock Setup

This screen allows the real time clock to be set.
Table 3-32 Operator Setup/Selections - Real Time Clock Setup
REAL TIME CLOCK SETUP Explanation

- Sets time and date.
SECOND: 06
MINUTE: 38
HOUR: 13
DATE: 02
MONTH : MARCH
YEAR: 2000
Play 1 Line - Press to choose next item

Play 5 Lines - Press to choose previous item
Play 10 Lines - Press to increase item value
Play 15 Lines - Press to decrease item value
Sound System Setup

This screen allows the sound volume to be set.
Table 3-33 Operator Setup/Selections - Sound System Setup
SOUND SYSTEM SETUP Explanation

- Sets sound volume.
Default level is low.
IIIIIIIIIIIIII
Play 1 Line - Press to increase volume item

Play 5 Lines - Press to decrease volume item
Play 10 Lines - Press to play machine tunes
Reel Spin Speed Setup

This option enables operators to select either Fast or Slow reel spin speed.
Table 3-34 Operator Setup/Selections - Reel Spin Speed Setup
REEL SPIN SPEED SETUP Explanation

-
SPEED : FAST Alters the reel spin speed
between fast and low
Play 10 Lines - Press to select reel speed
3-32 Revision 01
Layout Setup
This option, if available, provides operators the choice of selecting the Normal or
the Charcoal background for the game display.
Table 3-35 Operator Setup/Selections - Layout Setup
LAYOUT SETUP Explanation
LAYOUT : NORMAL - Alters the game layout

between normal and
charcoal
Play 10 Lines - Press to select new layout
3.3.6 Power Save Mode

Power Save Mode enables the machine to be placed in a cost-saving state in which
the machine is turned ON, but power is turned OFF to the video monitor and all
fluorescent lamps. Game play is disabled in this mode.
Power Save Mode can only be entered when player credits are zero and no other
lockups are active. The Power Savescreen is shown below.
Table 3-36 Power Save Mode
Explanation
Operator Key - Turn off to START Power Save Mode Machine is running but power is
cut to the video monitor and all
fluorescent lights.
Reserve - Press to return to previous menu without
entering Power Save Mode
Operator Key - Turn on again to EXIT Power Save Mode.

Turn Reset Key to reset lockup detected
in Power Save Mode
To exit from the power save function, turn the Operator Key ON. The machine
will return to the Operator Mode Menu. Turn the Jackpot (Reset) Key ON and
then OFF to reset the lockups detected.
3.3.7 Current Lockup Menu Fault Mode

The Mk4/5XR gaming machine has an extensive system of self-monitoring and
automatically enters fault mode when abnormal conditions are detected. In fault
mode, the game message area displays guidance information and the game is
disabled to prevent any further player interaction.
Entry to the Current Lockup Menu is achieved by turning the Operator Key ON
and selecting option 7 from the Operator Mode Menu. The menu is displayed and
the conditions requiring attention are highlighted by the characters ***. Each
lockup condition has an associated help screen outlining the procedure for fixing
the fault.
Revision 01 3-33
The Current Active Lockups Menu is shown below, followed by a summary of the
associated help screens.
Table 3-37 Fault Mode - Current Active Lockup Menu
CURRENT ACTIVE LOCKUP MENU
Jackpot Hopper Empty P1 - SEF Fail

Cancel Credit Hopper Jammed P2 - SEF Fail
Printer Cancel Credit Hopper Disconnected P3 - SEF Fail
***Main Door Open/Mismatch Illegal Coin Out P4 - SEF Fail
Cash Box Door Open 3 Way Memory Error P5 - SEF Fail
Top Box Door Open Self-Audit Error P6 - SEF Fail
Logic Door Open Game EPROMs Changed Power Save
Bill Acceptor Door Open Meters Disconnected Bill Acceptor Error
***Yoyo Meters Faulty Bill Acceptor Failed
Coin Acceptor Fault Meters Cage Open Bill Acceptor Full
Coin Optic Fault Machine Options Bill Acc Stacker
Coin Diverter Fault Printer Disconnected Bill Acceptor OOS
Cash Box Optic Fault Printer Fault
Paper Deplated
The characters *** are next to active lockups

Play 1 Line - Press to select next lockup
Play 5 Lines - Press to select previous lockup
Play 10 Lines - Press to see selected lockup help
3-34 Revision 01
Table 3-38 Fault Mode - Current Active Lockup Help Screens
CURRENT ACTIVE LOCKUP HELP SCREENS

LOCKUP HELP Screen Explanation and Advice
3 Way Memory Error - To reset this fault, turn the Operator Key ON to enter Operator Mode, and
follow the instructions on the screen.
Battery #1 Low - Battery low has been detected, to reset this fault, turn the reset key ON then
OFF. If the same battery is detected low again within the next hour Battery
#n is to be replaced. The machine is required to be shutdown as soon as
possible (say within the next 15 minutes).
Battery #2 Low - As Battery #1 above
Battery #3 Low - As Battery #1 above
Bill Acceptor Door - To reset this fault, close the Bill Acceptor Door.
Open
Cancel Credit - To reset Cancel Credit: - Turn the reset key switch ON then OFF.
Cash Box Door Open - To reset this fault, close the Cash Box Door.
Cash Box Optic Fault - To reset this fault, turn the reset key ON then OFF.
Coin Acceptor Fault - To reset this fault, turn the reset key ON then OFF.
Coin Diverter Fault - To reset this fault, turn the reset key ON then OFF.
Coin Optic Fault - To reset this fault, turn the reset key ON then OFF.
Game EPROMs - To reset this fault, turn the Operator Key ON to enter Operator Mode, and
Changed follow the instructions on the screen.
Hopper Disconnected - Reconnect the hopper. To reset this fault, turn the reset key ON then OFF.
Hopper Empty - Check if the hopper in empty - if so, refill the hopper. To reset this fault,
turn the reset key ON then OFF.
Hopper Jammed - Clear the reason for the hopper jam - check the hopper coin out sensor. To
reset this fault, turn of the reset key ON then OFF.
Illegal Coin Out - To reset this fault, turn the reset key ON then OFF.
Jackpot - No jackpot currently available on this machine.
Logic Door Open - To reset this fault, close the Logic Cage door.
Machine Options - To reset this fault: - Enter machine options setup menu.
Main Door Open / - To reset either of these faults, close the Main Door. With a MISMATCH
Mismatch condition it is possible that either the optic or mechanical door switch is
faulty or poorly aligned.
Meters Cage Open - To reset this fault: - Close the mechanical meter security cage door.
Meters Disconnected - To reset this fault: - Reconnect the mechanical meters.
Meters Faulty - To reset this fault: - Fix the faulty mechanical meter.
Note Acceptor Error - Bill Acceptor - Communications Error.
To reset this fault: - Disconnect then reconnect power to the bill acceptor. -
Turn the reset key ON then OFF.
Note Acceptor Failed - To reset this fault: - Empty the stacker. - Disconnect and then reconnect
power to the bill acceptor. - Turn the reset key ON then OFF.
Note Acceptor Full - To reset this fault: - Empty the stacker. - Disconnect and then reconnect
power to the bill acceptor. - Turn the reset key ON then OFF.
Note Acceptor OOS - Note Acceptor Out Of Service. To reset this fault: - Reconnect the bill
acceptor, then - Turn the reset key ON then OFF, or - Disable the bill
Revision 01 3-35
acceptor machine option.

Note Acceptor Stacker - Stacker Removed. To reset this fault: - empty the stacker. Replace the
stacker. Disconnect and then reconnect the power to the note acceptor.
P1 - SEF Fail - FAILED SUBSIDIARY EQUIPMENT FUNCTION - P1
To reset this fault: - Fix cap or equipment attached to PORT P1.
To reset this fault: - Fix cap or equipment attached to PORT P5, then turn
the reset key ON then OFF.
P6 - SEF Fail - FAILED SUBSIDIARY EQUIPMENT FUNCTION - P6.
To reset this fault: - Fix cap or equipment attached to PORT P6, then turn
the reset key ON then OFF.
Power Save - Exit from Power Save Mode by turning the Operator Mode key ON. The
Power Save Mode lockup can be cleared by turning the reset key ON then
OFF.
Printer Cancel Credit - To reset Printer Cancel Credit - Turn the reset key switch ON then OFF.
Printer Disconnected - To reset this fault: - Open the Main Door, - Check looming and reconnect
the Printer, - Close the Main Door, - Turn the reset key switch ON then
OFF.
Printer Fault - To reset this fault: - Open the Main Door, - Power down the gaming
machine, - Check the looming and reconnect the Printer, - Power up the
gaming machine, - Close the Main Door, - Turn the reset key switch ON
then OFF.
Printer Paper Depleted - To reset this fault: - Open the Main Door, - Remove the Printer, - Insert new
paper roll, - Replace the Printer, - Close the Main Door, - Turn the reset key
switch ON then OFF.
Top Box Door Open - To reset this fault, close the Top Box Door.
Yoyo - To reset this fault, turn the reset key ON then OFF.
3-36 Revision 01
NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual Cabinet, Door and Top Box
________Chapter 4________
Cabinet, Door and Top Box
4.1 General Description.......................................................................... 4-3
4.2 Technical Description ...................................................................... 4-5
4.2.1 Cabinet Door .............................................................................. 4-5

4.2.2 Latch Bar.................................................................................... 4-5
4.2.3 Keyed Lock ................................................................................ 4-7
4.2.4 Cabinet Security......................................................................... 4-7
4.2.5 Key Switches.............................................................................. 4-9
4.2.6 Bilock Locks ............................................................................. 4-10
4.2.7 Cash Box and Chute ................................................................ 4-11
4.2.8 Logic Cage ............................................................................... 4-11
4.2.9 Game Display Shelf ................................................................. 4-12
4.2.10 Cabinet Door Fluorescent Lighting........................................... 4-12
4.2.11 Cabinet Door Artwork ............................................................... 4-13
4.2.12 Mid Trim Panel ......................................................................... 4-14
4.2.13 Playbuttons .............................................................................. 4-14
4.2.14 Top Trim Panel......................................................................... 4-17
4.2.15 Monitor Mask............................................................................ 4-18
4.2.16 Coin Tray.................................................................................. 4-19
4.2.17 Belly Panel Door....................................................................... 4-19
4.2.18 Belly Panel Security ................................................................. 4-20
4.2.19 Top Box.................................................................................... 4-20
4.2.20 Top Box Artwork....................................................................... 4-20
4.2.21 Top Box Fluorescent Lighting................................................... 4-20
Revision 01 4-1
Cabinet, Door And Top Box NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual
List of Figures
Figure 4-1 Cabinet and Cabinet Door - General Description................................................ 4-4
Figure 4-2 Latch Bar ............................................................................................................. 4-6
Figure 4-3 Keyed Lock Assembly......................................................................................... 4-7
Figure 4-4 Photo-optic Emitter Adjustment ........................................................................... 4-8
Figure 4-5 Key Switches: Removal and Replacement ....................................................... 4-10
Figure 4-6 Bilock "U" Shaped Keyway and Quick Change Core Features......................... 4-10
Figure 4-7 Play Button Lamps ............................................................................................ 4-15
Figure 4-8 Playbutton - Exploded View .............................................................................. 4-17
Figure 4-9 Top Trim Panel and Monitor Mask ................................................................... 4-18
Figure 4-10 Top Box........................................................................................................... 4-21
4-2 Revision 01
4.1 General Description

The gaming machine cabinet, cabinet door, and top box are of welded sheet steel
construction, providing a strong and secure housing for the machine components.
The cabinet door features a triple-latch locking mechanism. Security switches
may be fitted to the cabinet door, the top box, and other components.
The major assemblies within the machine are detailed in separate chapters of this
manual.
The components covered in this chapter are as follows:
cabinet door
latch bar
key switches
cabinet door security
cash box chute
logic cage
game display shelf
cabinet door fluorescent lighting
mid-trim, coin entry and playbuttons
cabinet door artwork
monitor mask
coin tray
top box door
top box fluorescent lighting and reflector
top box door artwork
top box security
Figure 4-1 shows the major components of the machine.
Revision 01 4-3
Figure 4-1 Cabinet and Cabinet Door - General Description
4-4 Revision 01
4.2 Technical Description

The following sections describe the function and operation of the individual
machine components. Procedures are outlined for adjusting, removing and
replacing, and assembling and dissassembling components.
4.2.1 Cabinet Door

The cabinet door is fabricated from sheet steel. Mountings are provided in the
door for the lighting system, the coin handling system, the bank note acceptor
assembly, the coin tray, the speaker, and other devices. A belly panel is attached
to the main door which allows independent access to the bank note stacker.
The door is mounted to the cabinet on a full length hinge on the left-hand side of
the machine. A latch mechanism locates the door on the right-hand side. The
latch bar is operated by a keyed lock.
Removal and Replacement Procedures:

To remove the door:
1. Open the cabinet door, and switch OFF the machine.
2. Disconnect all looms between the door and the rest of the machine.
3. Remove the nut and bolt securing the door stay.
4. Disconnect the earth wire.
5. While supporting the weight of the door, remove the nuts securing the hinge
to the cabinet.
CAUTION
The door is a heavy item; follow the national
handling.
Replacement is a reversal of the removal procedure.
4.2.2 Latch Bar

To ensure that the cabinet door closes properly, the latch bar mounting may be
adjusted as follows (see Figure 4-2):
2. Loosen the two lock nuts to allow rotation of the plastic adjustors.
3. Rotate the two eccentric plastic adjustors until the door closes correctly.
4. Tighten the two lock nuts just enough to hold the adjustors securely.
To remove the latch bar:

2. Remove the bank note acceptor assembly for easy access (refer Bank Note
Acceptor chapter).
3. Remove the circlip and bearing from the bearing carrier.
Revision 01 4-5
4. Remove the nyloc nut from the earth loom and latch pin and withdraw the
latch pin, latch pin flange, and plastic washer.
5. Remove the two nuts and plastic adjustors from the latch bar.
6. Withdraw the latch bar from the door.
Plastic Adjusting Nut
Latch Bar
Bearing Carrier
Bearing Circlip
Photo-Optic
Securing Plate
Screw
Photo-Optic
Sensor
Lock Nut
Plastic Washer
Plastic Adjusting Nut
Latch Pin
Earth Loom
I0110
Latch Pin
Latch Pin Flange
Figure 4-2 Latch Bar
4-6 Revision 01
4.2.3 Keyed Lock

To remove a keyed lock from the door (see Figure 4-3):
Note
The procedure for lock removal is the same
for all keyed locks.

2. Remove the bank note acceptor assembly for easy access (refer Bank Note
Acceptor chapter).
3. Remove the cam nut and cam washer from the end of the lock.
4. Pull the cam off the lock. Note the position of the cam - it will make
replacement easier.
5. Remove the rotation limiting nut from the lock. Note the position of the
stops on the rotation limiting washer - it will make replacement easier.
6. Remove the lock nut and lock washer from the lock barrel.
7. Withdraw the lock barrel from the outside of the housing (cabinet door, top
box, etc).
Cam Washer
Rotation Limiting Washer
Cam Nut
Cam
(Top Box Shown)
Lock Nut
Lock Washer
I0111
Lock
Figure 4-3 Keyed Lock Assembly
Replacement is a reversal of the removal procedure. Once a lock has been

replaced, it is advisable to test it with the key to ensure that the cam washer and
the rotation limiting washer are located correctly.
4.2.4 Cabinet Security

In addition to the keyed lock, the gaming machine incorporates security
monitoring in the form of a mechanical switch and an optical sensor. If both
security devices do not provide the correct signals to the Main Board, a machine
alarm will sound, gameplay will be disabled, and the appropriate machine lockup
Revision 01 4-7
message will be displayed on the monitor screen. The security sensors are
monitored by the Main Board when the machine is powered.
The mechanical door switch is mounted on the bottom corner of the cabinet,
beside the mains switch box. When the door is properly closed, the switch is
activated and sends a signal to the Main Board indicating that the door is closed.
The optical sensor consists of an emitter and detector. The emitter is mounted to a
bracket on the right-hand side of the cabinet on a small bracket. The detector is
mounted to the latch bar in the cabinet door. When the door is properly closed,
the emitter and detector are aligned and a signal is sent to the Main Board
indicating that the door is closed.
Adjustment Procedures:
If the door is properly closed and a Door Mismatch - Main message appears,
then the optical sensor may require adjustment.
The emitter may be adjusted as follows:
1. Open the cabinet door.
2. Loosen the two screws fastening the emitter to the bracket on the right hand
side of the cabinet.
3. Move the emitter 1 mm in either direction.
4. Tighten the screws fastening the emitter.
5. Close the door and see if the Door Mismatch - Main lockup is activated.
If the optical sensor is still misaligned, repeat the above procedure.

Optical Sensor
The optical sensor (see Figure 4-4) may be removed as follows:
2. Unplug the optical switch looms from the Interface Board.
3. Remove the two screws and the clamp plate fastening the emitter to the
cabinet.
4. Remove the two screws fastening the detector to the latch bar (for easy
access, remove the Bank Note Acceptor (refer to Bank Note Acceptor
chapter)).
5. Remove the optical switch and looms from the machine.
Emitter
Cabinet
Screw
Loom
I0035
Figure 4-4 Photo-optic Emitter Adjustment
4-8 Revision 01
To replace the optical sensor, reverse the above procedure. After replacement of
the optical sensor, adjust its alignment as previously described.
Mechanical Door Switch

To remove the mechanical door switch:
1. Open the cabinet door and switch OFF the machine.
2. Using a flat-blade screwdriver, prise the mechanical switch from its
location.
3. Unplug the switch connectors.
The switch is replaced by firmly pushing it back into position.
4.2.5 Key Switches

The Jackpot Reset and Audit key switches are used to access and reset the
machine's software. The key switch functions are covered in detail in the chapter
Machine Modes.
The key switches are fixed to a common plate mounted to the inside wall of the
cabinet. The switches are connected by a loom to the Interface Board which
transfers the switch signals to the Main Board for processing.

Removal of the key switches is as follows (see Figure 4-5):
2. Unplug the key-switch loom from the Interface Board.
3. Remove the two nuts fastening the assembly to the cabinet wall.
4. Remove the key-switch assembly from the cabinet.
5. The individual key switches may be removed from the assembly:
a. Unplug or de-solder the loom from the key switch.
b. Remove the lock nut and washer from the switch body.
c. Pull the switch from the mounting plate.
Revision 01 4-9
Audit (Operator)
Key Switch
Lock Washer (2)
Lock Nut (2)
Studs (attached
to cabinet wall)
Nut (2) Washer (2) Mounting Plate

Cancel Credit
(Jackpot) Key
Switch
I0036 Loom
Figure 4-5 Key Switches: Removal and Replacement
4.2.6 Bilock Locks

The gaming machines may be fitted with high-security Bilock camlocks and
switchlocks with a unique "U" shaped keyway (see Figure 4-6). The locks feature
the Quick Change Core facility whereby the keyed core of the lock is fitted
separate to the lock barrel. Locks may be rekeyed in a matter of seconds without
having to dismantle the lock assembly.
To remove a lock assembly, simply unscrew the large nut on the lock barrel and
pull out the lock assembly.
Bilock Key Quick Change Core

Figure 4-6 Bilock "U" Shaped Keyway and Quick Change Core Features
4-10 Revision 01
4.2.7 Cash Box and Chute

When the hopper is full, subsequent coins entered into the gaming machine are
collected in the cash box, which is located in the cabinet base. Access to the cash
box is via a locked door that may be monitored by a security switch. The
procedure for clearing the cash box is controlled by house management. The cash
box is not a servicable item.
Coins enter the cash box via a plastic cash box chute, which is located at the
bottom of the cabinet, next to the hopper.

To remove the cash box chute:
2. Remove the hopper (refer to the Hopper chapter).
3. Remove the self-tapping screw securing the chute to the base of the cabinet.
4. Pull the chute from the cash box hole in the cabinet base.
4.2.8 Logic Cage

The logic cage is a steel enclosure with a hinged door in the front. The cage
houses the machine logic PCBAs. The door of the cage is fitted with a sliding
latch that also allows a security seal to be fitted. The door is fitted with a
microswitch used for signalling the machine software that the logic cage door has
been opened. In addition, one or two security key locks may also be fitted to the
cage door.
The logic cage sits below the game display shelf. It slots into the shelf at the back
and is fastened to it by three screws at the front.
Within the logic cage are brackets and plastic guides for locating the PCBAs. The
Interface Board is mounted to the cabinet at the back of the logic cage. When a
PCBA is fitted into the logic cage, it travels along the guides and is aligned with
the corresponding multi-way connector on the Interface Board.

To remove the logic cage from the cabinet:
2. Remove the hopper from the machine (refer the Hopper chapter).
3. Open the logic cage door. The door flips down and is spring loaded to stay
completely open.
4. Carefully lever the PCBAs out using the extractors. Standard Electrostatic
Discharge prevention procedures should be followed when removing
PCBAs. The PCBAs should be immediately placed into anti-static bags.
5. Disconnect all of the looms from the Interface Board. Make sure the
connectors are labelled to facilitate replacement.
6. Remove the three screws attaching the logic cage to the game display shelf.
7. Gently pull the logic cage (and the interface board) from the machine; the
tabs at the back of the cage will disengage from the shelf.
Revision 01 4-11
Disassembly and Assembly Procedures:

To disassemble the logic cage:
1. Remove the logic cage as previously described.
2. Remove the screws or nuts securing the individual components.
3. The PCB guides are removed by pulling them from their location holes.
Assembly is a reversal of the disassembly procedure. When replacing the cage

door catch, care should be taken not to overtighten the bolt as this could hinder the
sliding action of the catch.
4.2.9 Game Display Shelf

The game display shelf is a pressed sheet metal assembly that provides both a
strengthening cross brace to the cabinet structure and an area on which to mount
the video monitor. The logic cage also uses the game display shelf for its
mounting. The shelf is is welded to the inside of the cabinet and cannot be
removed.
4.2.10 Cabinet Door Fluorescent Lighting

The cabinet door is equipped with a fluorescent lighting system for illuminating
the belly panel artwork. Two 6 W fluorescent tubes are mounted on the reflector
panel in the cabinet door and are accessed via the belly panel door.
Note
Fluorescent tubes are 6 W to 7mm.
Each fluorescent tube is powered by an electronic ballast box, located on the door
reflector panel and accessed via the main door. The box is powered by 24 VDC
and contains electronic circuitry to regulate tube current and optimise tube starting
conditions. It has a connector for the fluoro loom to plug into.

WARNING
The high voltage used to power the lighting
system is potentially lethal. Ensure that the
machine is switched OFF before attempting
to replace fluorescent tubes or ballasts.
4-12 Revision 01
Fluorescent Tube:
WARNING
When the lighting system is working, the
fluorescent tube and reflector become very
hot.
To replace a fluorescent tube:

1. Open the cabinet door and switch OFF the machine. Take note of the
Danger and Warning guidance and act accordingly.
2. Unclip the fluorescent tube and carefully lift it from the lamp holders.
3. Insert the new fluorescent tube and clip it in so that it is secure in the lamp
holders.
4. Switch ON the machine, check the lighting system, and close and lock the
main door.
Ballast:
To remove either of the fluorescent ballasts:
2. Disconnect all looms from the ballast.
3. Squeeze the sides of the ballast housing to disengage the plastic clips, and
remove the ballast from the reflector panel.
To replace the fluorescent ballast, reverse the above procedure.
4.2.11 Cabinet Door Artwork

The belly panel door artwork panel is edgelit by the cabinet door fluorescent
lighting system. The artwork panel displays the machine game or paytable and
acts as an attraction to players.
The artwork is sandwiched between two pieces of polycarbonate which are held in
place against the belly panel door by slots along the top and bottom and retaining
brackets on each side.

To remove the artwork panel from the belly panel door:
1. Open the main door and switch OFF the machine.
2. Open the belly panel door.
3. Remove retaining brackets from each side of the artwork panel.
4. Carefully lift up the artwork panel and remove from the machine taking care
to clear the bottom retaining slot.
To replace the artwork, reverse the above procedure.
Revision 01 4-13
4.2.12 Mid Trim Panel

The mid-trim panel is fabricated from sheet steel. The function of the trim is to
act as a strengthening brace for the door assembly and to provide an area for the
playbuttons and coin entry to be mounted.
The mid-trim panel is attached to the door assembly by studs and screws. It can
be removed from the door for repair or replacement. Some game conversions on
machines require the mid-trim panel to be replaced to accommodate different
playbutton configurations.

To remove the mid trim panel from the door of the machine:
2. Remove the monitor mask (refer section in this chapter)
3. Remove the bank note acceptor assembly (refer Bank Note Acceptor
chapter).
4. Remove the coin handling system (refer Coin Handling System chapter).
5. Unplug all of the playbutton microswitches from the playbutton bodies
(refer Playbuttons section in this chapter). Mark each switch for easy
identification.
6. Remove the three screws that attach the mid trim to the door.
7. Detatch the mid trim panel from the door.
4.2.13 Playbuttons
The playbuttons function as the interface between the player and the machine.
Various games have different configurations of playbuttons, and the playbuttons
themselves may be either square, double square, rectangular, or double
rectangular.

Playbutton Lamp
WARNING
Lamp and logic looms operate on different

voltages - incorrect wiring may damage the
machine or cause improper operation.
The playbutton lamps are wedge base,

24 V DC, 3 W.
To replace a playbutton lamp, see Figure 4-7:

2. Grasp the microswitch and lamp holder unit and pull it down, out of the
body of the playbutton.
3. Pull out the faulty lamp.
4-14 Revision 01
4. Push in the replacement lamp.

5. Replace the microswitch and lamp holder unit by inserting it into the body
of the playbutton, then push the microswitch and lamp holder into the
playbutton body until an audible click indicates the parts are locked
together.
6. Switch ON the machine, close and lock the cabinet door and check the
button lamp.
Playbutton Mid Trim panel
Playbutton Body
Lamp
2
Lampholder and
Red/Grey White Microswitch
Red/Black
Grey
Playbutton Wiring
View from underside of playbutton
I0189
1
Figure 4-7 Play Button Lamps
Playbutton
To remove a playbutton from the mid trim panel:
2. From the underside of the body, squeeze together the two legs of the
playbutton, then from the top of the button (play button legs still together)
withdraw the lens/pushbutton assembly. The spring is loose in the
playbutton and drops away when the lens/pushbutton assembly is removed.
3. Remove the two self tapping screws securing the playbutton to the mid trim
panel.
4. Lift the playbutton from the mid trim panel.
To replace a playbutton into the mid trim panel:

1. Place the body of the button into the correct hole in the mid trim panel.
2. Secure the playbutton with two self tapping screws.
3. Place the spring into the lower section of the pushbutton (between the legs)
and hold it there.
Revision 01 4-15
4. Squeeze the two legs together then place the pushbutton into the body of the
playbutton.
5. Push the pushbutton down into the body until the legs pop out under the
body and hold the spring and pushbutton in place.
6. Place the lamp holder and microswitch into the body and push upwards until
the unit clips into place.
7. Confirm that all playbuttons light up correctly (see Chapter - Machine
Modes).
If a playbutton does not light up when it should, switch OFF the machine and
check the connections and the bulb.
Disassembly and Assembly Procedures:

To disassemble the playbutton, see Figure 4-8:
1. Remove the pushbutton assembly from the playbutton as previously
described.
2. Place a small screwdriver between the lens cover and the pushbutton and
prise the lens cover off.
3. Turn the pushbutton upside-down, and the lens and label will drop out.
To assemble the playbutton, see Figure 4-8:

1. Place the correct label between the lens cover and the lens making sure the
label is the correct way up.
2. Place the lens cover, complete with label and lens, onto the pushbutton and
clip into place.
3. Replace the lens/pushbutton assembly into the playbutton as previously
described.
4-16 Revision 01
Clear Lens Cover
Printed Label
Lens
Push Button
Spring
Self Tapping Screw

(2 per button)
Body
Mid Trim Panel
Lamp
Lampholder
Microswitch
I0185
Figure 4-8 Playbutton - Exploded View
4.2.14 Top Trim Panel

The top trim is fabricated from sheet steel. The trim provides the cabinet door
with a top strengthening brace for rigidity. The top trim is removable from the
door assembly and also acts as a clamp for the monitor mask.
Revision 01 4-17

To remove the top trim panel from the door, see Figure 4-9 and:
2. Remove the four nuts and washers attaching the trim to the door.
3. Pull the top trim panel off the door.
Top Trim
Panel
Monitor
Mask
Top Trim Monitor

Panel Screws Mask Screws
Gasket
Door
I0131
Figure 4-9 Top Trim Panel and Monitor Mask
4.2.15 Monitor Mask

The monitor mask is moulded from high strength plastic. The mask and a foam
tape gasket match up with the contour of the monitor to provide a protective seal
against moisture and intrusion.
The mask is held in position by screws and the top and mid trim panels.
4-18 Revision 01

To remove the monitor mask from the machine, see Figure 4-9 and:
2. Remove the top trim panel as described above.
3. Remove the nuts from the top and right hand side of the mask that secure it
to the cabinet door.
4. Gently manoeuvre the monitor mask out of the door.
4.2.16 Coin Tray

The coin tray provides a receptacle for coins or tokens that are dispensed by the
machine hopper, and for coins that are rejected by the coin handling system. The
tray consists of several parts which are assembled together and bolted onto the
lower section of the door.

To remove the coin tray from the machine:
2. Remove the bank note acceptor assembly (refer Bank Note Acceptor
chapter).
3. Remove the two screws that secure the coin tray to the latch bar bracket.
4. Remove the two screws that secure the coin tray to the cabinet door near the
hinge. The belly panel door will have to be open to access one of the
screws.
5. Remove the two nuts from under the bank note acceptor holding cradle.
6. Gently pull the coin tray from the door.
4.2.17 Belly Panel Door

The belly panel door is fabricated from sheet steel and is mounted to the cabinet
door on two high-strength hinges. The lock mechanism is located on the main
door.
To remove the belly panel door:
2. Remove the two door stays.
3. Remove door by lifting it off the two hinge pins.
Note
The hinges and hinge pins can be removed
from belly panel door and main door
respectively, by removing the screws
securing them.
Revision 01 4-19
4.2.18 Belly Panel Security

The belly panel door provides access to the Bank Note Stacker, fluorescent tubes
and the belly panel artwork. As well as a keyed lock, the belly panel door is fitted
with a mechanical security switch which signals the Main Board, when the
machine is powered, that the door has been opened.
4.2.19 Top Box

The gaming machine may be fitted with a high boy top box or a casino top box.
When no top box is fitted, the machine is referred to as a low boy. The top box
provides an area for displaying the game pay table and increases the visual impact
of the machine.
The top box door is hinged at the top and is opened to gain access to the top box
lighting system. Electromechanical meters may also be housed within the top box.
A key-operated latch mechanism is used to lock the top box.
To open the top box door:

2. Insert the top box key and turn it 90 clockwise.
3. Push in the top box latch pin, raise the door of the top box up and push in
hinged stays to hold it open.
4.2.20 Top Box Artwork

The polycarbonate artwork panel located in the top box door displays the game
paytable and acts as an attraction to players. It is backlit by the top box
fluorescent lighting system.
To remove the artwork panel:
1. Open the top box as described above.
2. Remove the lower trim from the top box door
3. Gently slide the artwork panel out of the door.
4.2.21 Top Box Fluorescent Lighting

The top box is equipped with fluorescent lighting for illuminating the top box
artwork panel. A 15 W fluorescent tube is mounted on the front of the reflector
panel inside the top box.
Note
Fluorescent tubes are 15 W to AS1201 (IEC
81) standard.
The lamp is powered from the high voltage power control system via a fluorescent
ballast, which is mounted to the back of the reflector panel. The fluorescent
ballast receives 24 V DC from the power supply assembly.
4-20 Revision 01

WARNING
The high voltage used to power the lighting
system is potentially lethal. Ensure that the
machine is switched OFF before attempting
to replace fluorescent tubes or ballasts.
Fluorescent Tube
To replace the top box fluorescent tube (see Figure 4-10):
WARNING
When the lighting system is working, the
fluorescent tube and reflector become very
hot.

2. Open the top box door as described above.
3. Rotate the tube 90 and pull it clear of the lamp holders.
4. Replace the tube by locating the ends of the new tube in the lamp holders
and rotate it 90.
5. Close and lock the top box door.
6. Switch ON the machine, close the cabinet door, and check the lighting
system.
Top Box Door
Top Box
Door Support
Fluorescent
Tube
Fluorescent
Ballast
Latch Lock and
Electromechanical Latch Pin
Mechanism Meters
I0190
Figure 4-10 Top Box
Revision 01 4-21
Ballast
The top box ballast is located either in front of or behind the reflector panel. To
remove the top box ballast:
2. Open the top box door as described above.
3. The ballast may be lcated behind the reflector panel. If it is, remove the
reflector panel as described below.
4. Disconnect all looms from the ballast.
5. Squeeze the sides of the ballast housing to disengage the plastic clips, and
remove the ballast from the reflector panel.
To replace the ballast, reverse the above procedure.
Top Box Reflector Panel

To remove the top box reflector panel:
1. Open the top box as described above.
2. Remove the screws securing the reflector panel to the sides of the top box.
3. Carefully lift the reflector panel from the top box.
4. Unplug the power loom from the fluoro loom.
To replace the reflector panel, reverse the above procedure.
4-22 Revision 01
4.3 General Maintenance

For the general maintenance of the cabinet, cabinet door and top box, the
following procedures should be carried out as part of regular machine servicing:
Clean the exterior of the machine using a non-abrasive household cleaning
solution.
Check that the cabinet door and top box door are not damaged.
Check that the cabinet earth leads are in good condition and securely
connected.
Check the condition of the artwork panels. Replace if necessary.
Check that the machine security features (eg: cabinet door photo-optic) are
functioning correctly and are not damaged.
Check the condition of the monitor mask. Replace if necessary.
Check the fluorescent lighting system works correctly. Replace any faulty
components.
Check that all playbuttons function correctly. Replace if necessary.
Check that there are no foreign objects in any of the security locks.
Check that all doors and latches close and lock correctly. Adjust if
necessary.
Revision 01 4-23
Notes
4-24 Revision 01
NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual Power Supply Assembly
________Chapter 5________
Power Supply Assembly
5.1 Physical Description ................................................................ 5-3
5.2 Basic Operation........................................................................ 5-5
5.3 Functional Specification.......................................................... 5-7
5.3.1 Input Requirements.................................................................... 5-7

5.3.2 Output Requirements ................................................................. 5-7
Mains GPO .................................................................................................. 5-7
Monitor Output ............................................................................................. 5-7
Generic Output 24 V DC .............................................................................. 5-7
Fluoro Output 24 V DC ................................................................................ 5-8
Output 12 V DC............................................................................................ 5-8
Overcurrent Protection................................................................................. 5-8
Overvoltage Protection ................................................................................ 5-8
Inrush Current .............................................................................................. 5-9
5.3.3 Control Signals ........................................................................... 5-9
Low-Power Mode Signal .............................................................................. 5-9
Power Fail Signal ......................................................................................... 5-9
5.3.4 Physical Connections ................................................................. 5-9
External Mains Switch Outputs .................................................................... 5-9
Off-Line Converter Output............................................................................ 5-9
Fluorescent Lamp Outputs ........................................................................ 5-10
5.4 Removal and Replacement Procedures ............................... 5-11
5.4.1 Fuses ....................................................................................... 5-11

5.4.2 Power Supply Assembly........................................................... 5-11
5.5 General Maintenance ............................................................. 5-12
Revision 01 5-1
Power Supply Assembly NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual
List of Figures
Figure 5-1 Power Supply Assembly Location ....................................................................... 5-3
Figure 5-2 Power Supply Assembly...................................................................................... 5-4
Figure 5-3 Power Supply Assembly Wiring Diagram............................................................ 5-5
Figure 5-4 Low Voltage Power Distribution .......................................................................... 5-6
5-2 Revision 01

The power supply assembly provides power to the electronic and electrical devices
within the machine. It also performs electromagnetic interference (EMI) filtering
and protects the system from adverse input disturbances such as lightning and
voltage fluctuation.
The power supply metal enclosure is divided into two separate areas by an internal
metal bracket. The area on one side of the bracket accommodates the mains filter,
switches, fuses, surge protection, the solid-state relay, and wiring between the
components mounted to the metal enclosure. The area on the other side of the
bracket accommodates the off-line power supply, which consists of a switched
mode power converter PCBA.
For easy access, the mains switch is located in a separate switch box that is
positioned towards the front of the cabinet. The switch box is linked to the power
supply box using mains cable. The mains ON/OFF switch controls the power to
all equipment in the cabinet, apart from any equipment that may be powered from
the general purpose outlet (GPO). See Figure 5-1 for the location of the power
supply assembly location and Figure 5-2 for the assembly components.
Power Supply
Assembly
Mains Switch
I0043
Figure 5-1 Power Supply Assembly Location
Revision 01 5-3
24 V DC Output 12 V DC Isolated Output
Connectors for
Fluorescent Ballasts 150 mm
Power Converter PCBA
GPO
Mains Ventilation
Monitor
Connector Output, Area used for
and Fuse Switch, high-voltage
and Fuse assembly
Mains Voltage 300 mm

Selector
Front view View from right

Mains Input
127 mm
Mains
Switch
I0044
Figure 5-2 Power Supply Assembly
The power supply assembly consists of the following components:

Mains switch (located in the switch box).
Mains input socket.
EMI filter and surge protection device.
Switched mode power converter PCBA, internally fused.
Mains selector switch. This switch is used to select the correct mains input
voltage of either 110/120 V AC or 220/230/240 V AC.
Generic 24 V DC output socket (connects to the Interface Board to provide
power for the low voltage components of the machine).
12 V DC output socket. This outlet provides power for subsidiary equipment.
24 V DC switchable output for the electronically driven fluorescent lighting
system.
Separately fused, switched mains output for the monitor
Solid-state relay for switching monitor and fluorescent lamps to low-power
mode.
5-4 Revision 01
General Purpose Outlet (GPO). This outlet is separately fused and switched
and used to provide mains power for any accessories or test equipment that
may need to be connected during maintenance.
5.2 Basic Operation

The power supply assembly receives 110/120 V AC or 220/230/240 V AC mains
input via a standard IEC socket.
The mains input is switched, filtered, and surge protected before connection to the
monitor and the off-line power supply.
The off-line power supply unit consists of a switched mode converter on a PCB.
It provides power outputs of 12 V DC and 24 V DC and the control signal Power
Fail.
The 24 V output is used to power the Main Board, the electronic ballasts for the
fluorescent tubes, and all other machine components requiring low-voltage power.
The 12 V output is used to power LAB subsidiary equipment or other machine
peripherals.
A separately switched and fused mains GPO is provided via an IEC female
connector.
The power supply operation and distribution are shown in the following diagrams:
Mains Switch Box
Low Power Mode

Signal from
IEC Socket Main Board
Zero Cross
(Mains Input) Switch
Fuse
Live
FILTER Monitor
Output
Neutral
Switch
Ground
24 V DC
Fuse
Ballast
Interface Output x 2
Switch
Fuse
24 V DC
Mains Switched Mode
Output Power Converter
12 V DC
IEC Female Outlet

I0045
Figure 5-3 Power Supply Assembly Wiring Diagram
Revision 01 5-5
12 V DC isolated Subsidary Equipment

Low Voltage
Output from
Power Supply
Assembly
24 V DC Fluorescent Ballasts
Interface PCB
24 V DC
24 V DC 5 V DC 24 V DC 12 V DC 22.5 V DC
12 V DC 5 V DC isolated 5 V DC 22.5 V DC 12 V DC
+/-12 V DC isolated 5 V DC
5 V DC isolated
+/-12 V DC isolated
Main PCB I/O Driver PCB

Machine Components
and Peripherals
I0046
Figure 5-4 Low Voltage Power Distribution
5-6 Revision 01
5.3 Functional Specification
WARNING
The mains voltage selector switch must be
set for the correct voltage range before
power is connected to the machine.
Selecting the wrong voltage will cause
irrevocable damage to the machine.
5.3.1 Input Requirements

The power supply assembly is designed to accept a nominal mains input voltage
of either 110/120 V AC or 220/230/240 V AC. The mains input voltage defines
the monitor outlet voltage and the GPO voltage. The mains selector switch must
be set to the correct mains input voltage before power is connected. This switch is
mounted on the metal housing of the power control assembly. The input voltage
ranges and current requirements are as follows:
220 V AC - 10% to 240 V AC + 10%, 50 Hz at 6 A maximum (198-264 V AC)
or
110 V AC - 10% to 120 V AC + 10%, 60 Hz at 10 A maximum (99-132 V AC)
Physical Connection
Mains input is via a standard IEC socket mounted on the metal housing.
5.3.2 Output Requirements
Mains GPO
Voltage and Current
+0%, -2% of the input mains voltage at 0 A to 1 A.
Physical Connection
Mains output is via a standard female IEC socket. This output is separately
switched and fused. This fuse is externally accessible.
Monitor Output
Voltage and Current
+0%, -2% of the input mains voltage at 0 A to 1.2 A.
Physical Connection
The monitor output is provided via a Molex Minifit Junior 6-pin connector plug
mounted on the metal housing. This output is separately fused, and the fuse is
externally accessible.
Generic Output 24 V DC
Provides power to the Interface Board for distribution to the Main Board, the I/O
Driver Board, and other low-voltage machine components and peripherals.
Maximum current is specified considering present requirements and allowing for
future flexibility.
Revision 01 5-7
Vout = +24 V DC +/-5%

Iout = 0.5 to 15.0 A continuous
Ripple = 200 mVp-p, measured at 0-20 MHz
Fluoro Output 24 V DC
Provides power for the fluorescent lighting system.
Vout = +24 V DC +/-5%
Output 12 V DC
Provides power for subsidiary equipment. Isolation of 3 kV is required between
this output, other secondaries and primary.
Vout = +12 V DC +/-5%
Overcurrent Protection
Generic Output 24 V - The output is limited to constant output current in the
range 17.1 A to 22 A. The response time for the overcurrent circuit is between 20
and 150 ms. Shorter response times can cause malfunction due to short circuit
glitches.
The power will recover if the overcurrent duration is shorter than the recovery
time. If the overcurrent duration is longer than the recovery time, the power
supply shuts down and has to be switched off/on for 1-3 seconds to recover.
During shutdown state, the output 24 voltage is less than 1 V DC.
Current limits are stated for no load condition in the fluoro 24 V output. Generic
output protection includes a 2 A current margin dedicated to the fluoro lamps.
Therefore, the current limits can be reduced by up to 2 A depending on the fluoro
load.
Fluoro Output 24 V - The output is limited to constant output current above 2 A.
The response time for the overcurrent circuit is specified in seconds. Shorter
times can cause malfunction of the electronic ballast and result in the fluoro tube
not starting. The output will recover when the overcurrent is removed.
Output 12 V - The output is limited to constant output current in the range 3.1-
7 A. The power will recover when the overcurrent is removed.
Overvoltage Protection
All peripherals connected to the 24 V output rail are protected against an
accidental increase of the output voltage. When the voltage rises above 281 V,
the entire power supply will shut down.
5-8 Revision 01
Inrush Current
Some peripherals exhibit significant inrush current when first powered. The
power supply has to cope with these temporary transients and remain stable.
Maximum steady-state current drawn from the 24 V output is 14.45 A. If a
Westrex printer is fitted, it causes an additional current spike that increases the
maximum current to 17 A. The steady-state current limitation for the output is
17.1 A. Therefore, the off-line converter is capable of handling the current
demands of normal machine operation.
5.3.3 Control Signals

Low-Power Mode Signal
This signal is generated by the Main Board and is used to switch the machine to
low-power mode.
Power Fail Signal

The power fail signal provides a warning to the system of imminent mains failure.
The power supply is designed such that one full missing period of mains (50 Hz or
60 Hz) cannot have any effect on the correct operation of the power supply
assembly. The PFAIL signal is generated by the power converter PCBA when the
input mains rectified voltage drops below a threshold. This feature maintains the
+24 V DC output within regulation for a minimum of 25 ms following a power
fail signal. This allows enough time for mechanical meters to finish counting and
for the CPU to back up the audit data held in the machine RAM before the power
shuts down.
After mains voltage recovery, PFAIL can be inactivated when the level of the
24 V output reaches at least 22.5 V.
5.3.4 Physical Connections

External Mains Switch Outputs
The mains switch is connected to the power supply box via a 4-pin AMP, Mate-N-
Lock compatible, universal connector. This connector is used for its high current
capability per pin.
The pin functions of this connector are shown below.
Pin Signal Comments
1 N ret Mains neutral line switched
2 A ret Mains active line switched
3 A Mains active line to the mains switch
4 N Mains neutral line to the mains switch
Off-Line Converter Output

Two secondary output connectors are provided: one for the 24 V DC output and
the control signals, the other for the 12 V DC output.
Revision 01 5-9
The secondary output 24 V and the control signals are connected to the power
supply assembly via a Molex Minifit Junior 14-pin connector soldered directly to
the PCBA. The socket fits into an opening in the metal housing and connects, via
a loom, to the 16-way Minifit Junior connector P29 on the Interface Board.
The pin functions of the connector are as described in the following table.
Pin Function Comments
1 LowPower low power mode (input)
2 OUTFAIL Output 24 V correct (output)
3 output 24 V power for machine, +24 V
8
9 PFAIL mains voltage missing (output)
10 output GND24 ground, +24 V
The secondary output 12 V is connected via a 4-pin Molex Minifit Junior

compatible header soldered directly onto the power supply PCBA. The socket fits
into an opening in the metal housing.
The pin functions of the connector are as described in the following table.
Pin Function Comments
1 output 12 V isolated power, +12 V
3
4
Fluorescent Lamp Outputs

Voltage and Current
24 V DC 5% at 0 A to 2.0 A for all outputs.
Physical Connections
Two 24 V outputs are provided to power the top box fluorescent lamp and the
cabinet door fluorescent lamps. The electronic ballasts used provide the
possibility of daisy chaining the 24 V power rail for future adaptability. Outputs
are via 4-pin Molex Minifit Junior compatible connectors, which are mounted on
the metal housing. The pin functions are shown in the table below.
Pin Signal Function
1
2 GND 24 V ground, 24 V
3
4 +24 V power for fluorescent lamps, +24 V
5-10 Revision 01
5.4 Removal and Replacement Procedures

5.4.1 Fuses
The switched mode power supply fuse is an internal non-serviceable component.
If this fuse is blown, the power supply box must be shipped to the manufacturer
for service (contact the nearest Aristocrat office).
The monitor fuse and the GPO fuse are externally accessible and may be replaced
as described below (see Figure 5-2):
WARNING
240 V AC mains voltage is present in the
power supply assembly even when the
machine is switched OFF. The mains input
cable must be unplugged before attempting
to replace a fuse.
1. Open the cabinet door, and switch OFF the mains switch and the GPO
switch.
2. Unplug the Mains Input cable from the power supply assembly.
3. Remove the fuse cap from the fuse holder by unscrewing it in an
anticlockwise direction. The fuse should spring out of the holder.
4. Remove the blown fuse and insert the new fuse into the cap. Insert the fuse
cap into the holder, screwing it in a clockwise direction. Do not overtighten.
5. Switch ON the mains switch and the GPO switch. Check that both the
monitor and the mains GPO have power. Close and lock the cabinet door.
5.4.2 Power Supply Assembly

To remove the power supply assembly from the machine (see Figure 5-2):
WARNING
240 V AC mains voltage is present in the
Power Supply Assembly even when the
machine is switched OFF. The mains input
cable must be unplugged before attempting
to remove the power supply assembly.
1. Open the cabinet door, and switch OFF the mains switch and the GPO
switch.
2. Remove the hopper to gain access to the power supply assembly (refer to the
chapter Hopper).
3. Unplug the Mains Input cable from the power supply assembly.
4. Unplug all other looms and connectors from the power supply assembly.
Revision 01 5-11
5. Remove the screw securing the earth lead from the power supply assembly
to the cabinet.
6. Unscrew the two screws that secure the power supply assembly to the
cabinet base. One of these screws is positioned below the mains input plug
and cannot be removed while the plug is connected.
7. Pull the power supply assembly forward and remove from the cabinet.
Replacement is a reversal of the removal procedure. Ensure that the earth lead is
correctly replaced.
Note
Run a complete machine test after replacing
the power supply box or any power supply
component.

The following procedures should be carried out as part of regular machine
maintenance:
Check that all connections to the power supply box are secure.
Remove any dust or dirt accumulating on the power supply assembly.
5-12 Revision 01
NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual Coin Handling Assembly
________Chapter 6________
Coin Handling Assembly
6.1 Overview............................................................................................ 6-3
6.2 Basic Operation ................................................................................ 6-4
6.2.1 Validation ................................................................................... 6-4

6.2.2 Rejected Coins........................................................................... 6-5
6.2.3 Accepted Coins .......................................................................... 6-5
6.2.4 Alarm.......................................................................................... 6-6
6.2.5 Inhibit All..................................................................................... 6-6
6.2.6 Self Calibration........................................................................... 6-6
6.2.6 Diagnostics................................................................................. 6-6
6.2.7 Debris Flap ................................................................................. 6-6
6.3 Removal and Replacement .............................................................. 6-7
6.4 Clearing Coin Jams .......................................................................... 6-7
6.5 CN133A Coin Validator Connector Pinouts.................................... 6-8
6.6 Diverter Solenoid and Photo-Optic Sensor .................................... 6-9
6.6.1 Physical Description ................................................................... 6-9

6.6.2 Basic Operation.......................................................................... 6-9
6.6.3 Removal and Replacement ...................................................... 6-10
6.7 Fault Finding ................................................................................... 6-11
Revision 01 6-1
Coin Handling Assembly NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual
List of Figures
Figure 6-1 Condor Coin Handling Assembly ........................................................................ 6-3
Figure 6-2 Condor Coin Validator ......................................................................................... 6-5
Figure 6-3 Diverter Solenoid and Photo-Optic Sensor ......................................................... 6-9
List of Tables
Table 6-1 Condor Validator Interface Signals....................................................................... 6-8
Table 6-2 Fault Finding....................................................................................................... 6-11
6-2 Revision 01
6.1 Overview
The coin handling system (see Figure 6-1) consists of a coin validator for
determining the validity of inserted coins, a coin diverter and coin chuting for
directing the coins to the correct destination, and a photo-optic module for
monitoring the position of the coin diverter. The handling system is fitted and
adjusted at the factory to suit a specific coin denomination.
The coin entry, located on the cabinet door trim, is designed to accept a specific
coin denomination for a particular machine. It will not accept oversized or bent
coins. The coin entry ensures that the coin is directed into the validator correctly.
Player Coin Entry
Con dor Condor Validator
Photo-optic
Sensor
Coin Diverter Valid Coin

Solenoid to Hopper
I0193
Valid Coin
to Cash Box
Rejected Coin
to Coin Tray
Figure 6-1 Condor Coin Handling Assembly
Revision 01 6-3
The coin validator, coin chuting and diverter solenoid are mounted to a panel on
the inside of the cabinet door. Coins inserted into the machine pass through the
validator which compares the properties of inserted coins with preset limits stored
in the validator software. The validator sends signals to the Main Board, via the
Interface Board and I/O Driver Board that allow the machine software to
determine the validity of the coins. Accepted coins are directed to the accept
chute, and rejected coins are directed to the chip tray via the reject chute.
The coin diverter solenoid is powered from the 24 V DC supply. The coin
validator receives 12 V DC derived from the 24 V DC supply using a switch mode
regulator on the Driver Board.
The machine uses the Condor CN133A Validator.
6.2 Basic Operation

The following sections describe the operation of the coin chute assembly.
6.2.1 Validation
The Condor Coin Validator CN133A (see Figure 62) is pre-programmed to
accept a specific coin type and cannot be reprogrammed in the field. The validator
is clearly labelled with the pre-programmed coin type.
Once in the validator, the coin passes a sensor coil that detects its diameter,
thickness, and magnetic properties.
The validator uses two sets of sensors for coin discrimination: opto and inductive.
This combination gives a high degree of security.
The inductive sensor pair has been designed to achieve a linear field independent
of coin position. In a typical validator, the coin position relative to sensors is
critical for accurate discrimination.
Two inductive sensors are positioned on opposite sides of the coin path and are
switched between in-phase and anti-phase as the coin passes. The network
impedance is affected by the coin thickness and conductivity. The resulting
amplitude change is measured by a microcontroller and forms the basis of the
inductive discrimination. The readings are compared against preset limits stored
in the validator.
The opto system measures coin diameter. There are three longitudinal IR beams
across the coin path. A 16-bit timer uses a 3-point measurement system to obtain a
precise measurement of diameter. The resulting calculation of diameter is
compared against preset limits. Like the inductive sensors, the opto sensors are
part of a closed loop system that maintains very fast triggering for accurate timing.
It also ensures that slight variations which occur from mechanism to mechanism
(such as component tolerance) are irrelevant.
6-4 Revision 01
6.2.2 Rejected Coins

If both sets of sensor readings are not within the required limits, the validator
rejects the inserted coin and sends it to the coin reject tray.
6.2.3 Accepted Coins

If both sets of sensor readings are within the required limits, the coin is deemed
true, the Valid Advance Coin Signal (VACS) output pulse is generated, and the
coin accept solenoid is activated. This solenoid is attached to a gate that opens
when the solenoid is activated, allowing the valid coin to fall directly into the
accept chute.
As the coin exits the validator, it passes a photo-optic sensor and a CREDIT
output pulse is generated.
Accepted coins are directed to either the hopper or the cash box, depending on the
position of the coin diverter, which depends on whether or not the hopper is full.
Coin Entry
Locating Pin
(4 off)
Debris Flap
Connector
for Loom
to Machine
Accepted I0052
Coins
Rejected
Coins
Figure 6-2 Condor Coin Validator
Revision 01 6-5
6.2.4 Alarm
If the validator detects a coin travelling in the wrong direction (yo-yo) or a failed
or blocked credit or reject optic, an Alarm output pulse is generated.
On receiving this Alarm signal:
the gaming machine shuts down
an alarm is sounded
a fault message is displayed on the screen
6.2.5 Inhibit All

For greater functionality and overall security, the host machine can send the
INHIBIT ALL signal to prevent the validator from accepting any coins or tokens.
6.2.6 Self Calibration

The validator automatically recalibrates itself in relation to its environment
approximately every 210 seconds.
6.2.6 Diagnostics
At power up, the validator automatically runs a self diagnostic test on the
following critical areas:
Inductive Coils
Reflective Sensors
Diameter Opto Sensors
Credit Opto Sensors
If there is a failure in any one of these areas, the LED on the back of the validator
will flash red continuously and the validator will not accept any coins until power
is removed and the fault condition corrected.
6.2.7 Debris Flap

The CN133A Validator incorporates a debris flap that allows direct access to the
coin path for inspection and the clearance of coin jams.
6-6 Revision 01
6.3 Removal and Replacement

To remove the validator:
2. Carefully unplug the loom from the validator to the Interface Board. Do not
pull on the wires.
3. Push the assembly upwards to the full extent of the top locating groove.
This action causes the validator to come free of the bottom locating groove.
4. Swing the bottom of the unit outwards and down to clear the coin chute
assembly.
To replace the validator, reverse the above procedure.
6.4 Clearing Coin Jams

When a coin jams in the coin validator assembly or chuting, the machine locks up
and displays one of the following fault messages: COIN ACCEPTOR FAULT,
COIN OPTIC FAULT, or COIN DIVERTER FAULT.
To clear the coin jam, take the following action (see Figures 6-1 and 6-2):
2. Carefully clear any coins from the coin chuting.
3. Check for jammed coins in the validator. To remove the validator, refer to
the above procedures.
4. Open the debris flap and remove any jammed coins.
CAUTION
The debris flap is spring loaded. Close the
flap gently to avoid damaging the ferrites and
standoffs.
5. Replace the validator and reconnect the looms.

6. Ensure that the validator and chuting are clear by dropping a coin through
while the cabinet door is still open.
7. Switch ON the machine; close and lock the main door.
8. To reset the machine, turn the Jackpot Reset key ON then OFF.
Revision 01 6-7
6.5 CN133A Coin Validator Connector Pinouts

The connector J1 on the right of the validator connects to P12 on the Interface
Board.
The Interface Board connects P12 to the coin interface section of the I/O Driver
Board which receives the signals from the coin validator and solenoid optics and
converts them into the form required by the Main Board. For a description of the
coin handling interface refer to the I/O Driver Board chapter.
The signals to and from the coin validator are shown in the following table.
Table 6-1 Condor Validator Interface Signals

Pin Signal Description
1 0V Ground
2 VACS Generated when valid coin is sensed
3 Alarm Yo-yo or optic blocked
4 Credit Generated when valid coin exits validator
5 Keyed Pin
6 +12V Power from I/O Driver Board
7 Inhibit Inhibit signal from host machine
6-8 Revision 01
6.6 Diverter Solenoid and Photo-Optic Sensor
6.6.1 Physical Description

Figure 6-3 shows the diverter solenoid and the photo-optic sensor, mounted on the
coin chute assembly.
Figure 6-3 Diverter Solenoid and Photo-Optic Sensor
6.6.2 Basic Operation

The solenoid plunger is mechanically linked to the coin diverter in the coin chute
assembly. When no power is applied to the solenoid, the plunger is extended and
valid coins fall into the hopper. When 24 V DC is applied to the solenoid, the
plunger retracts, causing the diverter to redirect valid coins to the cash box. A tab
at the lower end of the plunger interrupts the beam in the photo-optic sensor when
the plunger is fully extended. When this beam is interrupted, the signal CDIVPOS
to the Driver Board is set to high.
In this way, the machine software can indirectly monitor the destination of
accepted coins by monitoring the position of the diverter. If the machine software
detects that five consecutive coins intended for the hopper are diverted to the cash
box, or vice versa, the machine locks up with the fault message COIN
DIVERTER FAULT (refer to Table 6-2).
Revision 01 6-9
6.6.3 Removal and Replacement

Photo-optic Sensor
To remove the photo-optic sensor:
2. Remove the Bank Note Acceptor (refer to Bank Note Acceptor chapter).
3. Remove the connector from the bottom of the sensor
4. Remove the screw that secures the sensor to the holding bracket and
manoeuvre sensor out of machine.
To replace the sensor, reverse the above procedure.
Divert Solenoid
To remove the divert solenoid:
2. Remove the screw that secures the solenoid to the holding bracket and
manoeuvre the solenoid out of machine
3. Remove the two spade connectors.
To replace the solenoid, reverse the above procedure.
6-10 Revision 01
6.7 Fault Finding
Table 6-2 Fault Finding
Fault Probable Cause Corrective Action

Coins continually rejected. Validator fault 1. Check that the validator has
power.
2. Remove any blockage or debris
from the validator.
3. Otherwise, replace the validator.
All coins are going to the The diverter solenoid is 1. Check that the solenoid has
cash box and the hopper is not working. power.
empty. 2. Check that the coin diverter has
not jammed.
3. Check that the hopper probe is
not permanently grounded.
Rejected coins not falling Coins jammed in the Carefully clear the reject chute.
into the reject tray. reject chute.

For general maintenance of the coin handling:
Coin Validator
Open the debris flap and clean the coin path using a clean dry cloth or a soft,
long-bristle paint brush.
Coin Chute Assembly

Check that all assembly bolts and nuts are tight.
Clean the coin chuting with a clean dry cloth or a soft, long bristle paint
brush.
Revision 01 6-11
Notes
6-12 Revision 01
NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual Bank Note Acceptor
______Chapter 7______
Bank Note Acceptor
7.1 Technical Description .............................................................. 7-3
7.1.1 Overview .................................................................................... 7-3

7.1.3 VFM4 Non-isolated Serial Interface ......................................... 7-10
7.2 Installation and Machine Conditions .................................... 7-13
7.2.1 Configuration Setup ................................................................. 7-13

7.2.2 Machine Condition Indicators ................................................... 7-13
7.3.1 Clearing the Bank Note Stacker ............................................... 7-15

7.3.2 Bank Note Acceptor Assembly................................................. 7-16
7.3.3 Clearing Bank Note Acceptor Jams ......................................... 7-16
7.4 Care and Maintenance ........................................................... 7-18
7.4.1 Troubleshooting ....................................................................... 7-18

7.4.2 Periodic Maintenance............................................................... 7-20
7.4.3 Video Level Calibration ............................................................ 7-20
Revision 01 7-1
Bank Note Acceptor NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual
List of Figures
Figure 7-1 Bank Note Acceptor Assembly............................................................................ 7-4
Figure 7-2 Bank Note Acceptor Dual Cage Assembly.......................................................... 7-5
Figure 7-3 Bank Note Acceptor with open Upper Guide ...................................................... 7-6
Figure 7-4 Stacker ................................................................................................................. 7-7
Figure 7-5 Typical Mid Trim Layout ...................................................................................... 7-8
Figure 7-6 Input/Output Connector....................................................................................... 7-9
Figure 7-7 Interconnection Diagram ..................................................................................... 7-9
Figure 7-8 Bezel Assembly Indicators - LED Displays ....................................................... 7-10
Figure 7-9 VFM4 Protocol - Accept and Return Messages ................................................ 7-11
Figure 7-10 VFM4 Protocol - Hex Code Messages............................................................ 7-12
Figure 7-11 Operator Setup Mode - Machine Options ....................................................... 7-13
Figure 7-12 Bank Note Acceptor - DIP Switch Location..................................................... 7-19
List of Tables
Table 7-1 Bank Note Acceptor Fault Finding...................................................................... 7-18

Table 7-2 Bank Note Acceptor DIP Switch Functions ........................................................ 7-19
7-2 Revision 01
7.1.1 Overview
The Aristocrat Bank Note Acceptor and ancillary items provide advanced
solutions for the entry, security, analysis, and accounting of note currency. It
communicates with the Main Board via generic serial channel 1 which is
connected via P18 on the Interface Board.
The full system provides a range of features, including:
A bank note acceptor for entry, sensing and acceptance of note currency.
The unit is equipped with a microcontroller, RAM memory, and an
operating system. It is accessed via the main door.
A Stacker unit holds accepted notes in a highly secure environment. It is
electronically linked to the bank note acceptor and stores details of machine
performance and bank note acceptor processing. It is accessed via the belly
panel door.
The Aristocrat Dual Cage Assembly houses the bank note acceptor and
stacker while allowing note entry to be conveniently placed on the mid
trim. The assembly encloses the stacker behind the belly panel door and the
bank note acceptor stacker cage door.
The illuminated Intelligent Bezel facilitates player recognition of the note
insertion area and displays acceptable note denominations. The bezel also
provides maintenance error messages for abnormal events occurring in the
acceptor and the stacker.
Diagnostics information on machine operations and historical details are
available through the RS-232 port.

The bank note acceptor (see Figure 7-1) consists of an optical scanning unit linked
to a bank note stacker for the entry and storage of a range of note denominations.
The entire unit, located within the bank note acceptor dual-cage assembly, is
attached to the inside of the main door.
The note entry channel is situated on the mid trim, together with the pushbuttons,
coin entry assembly, and note-denomination display panel. The bank note stacker
is accessed for removal and emptying by opening the belly panel door and then
opening the bank note acceptor security cage door.
Opening the main door is only necessary should access to the bank note acceptor
scanning unit, controls, and indicators become necessary.
Revision 01 7-3
Dual Cage Bank Note Acceptor

Catch & Spring Retaining Clip
Connector
Bank Note Acceptor
to Machine
Note Stacker Lock

(up to 2 Locks)
Bank Note
Stacker Bank Note
Door Acceptor
Location Pin
& Slot
Dual Cage
Bank Note Assembly
Stacker
Dual Cage Stop

I0068
Location & Pivot
Figure 7-1 Bank Note Acceptor Assembly
Dual Cage Assembly

The bank note acceptor is located within a dual-cage housing (see Figure 7-2),
which is mounted close to the edge of the main door. The dual cage design
ensures the stacker is protected when the belly panel door or main door is opened
for maintenance and routine operations.
The housing unit is pivot-hinged at the base to improve the various access
operations and is held in position by the top catch. Limited access to the scanning
channel is possible from the main door when the top catch is released and the top
of the entire assembly is drawn back from the main door. Power cable and
indicator looms are routed along the main door to the appropriate units.
7-4 Revision 01
Outer Cage
Top Catch
Locking Latch
and Spring
Retainer Grooves
Stacker Dual
Locks
Inner
Cage Outer Cage
Groove -
Stacker Lock Inner Cage
Pivot
Outer Cage
Locating Bar
Cage Door
I0067
Figure 7-2 Bank Note Acceptor Dual Cage Assembly
Bank Note Acceptor

Mechanics and Transport
The bank note acceptor employs four mounting posts which locate in the dual
cage assembly. The main bank note acceptor housing supports and aligns the
drive rollers and drive stepper motor while providing mounts for the other
subassemblies of the unit. The drive rollers provide power to the drive belts
which transport the notes or coupons past the circuitry and out of the unit to the
stacker.
The two drive belts are individually tensioned to assure a reliable and straight
feed.
Upper and Lower Guides

The upper guide assembly of the Bank Note Acceptor supports and locates the
pressure rollers that force the note to the drive belts for traction. It also supports
and locates part of the validation circuitry which examines the note as it passes
through the unit. The upper guide clips into position on the main unit and is
pivoted at its lower end. This allows the note channel to be opened so that
maintenance and cleaning operations can be carried out and any jammed notes can
be removed.
Revision 01 7-5
Clip
Lower Guide
26 Way
Note Transport Connector
Belt and (to Machine)
Drive Roller
Magnetic Read
Head
Upper Guide
Location
Pins
Optical Scanners Self-aligning

Connector
Pressure Roller to Stacker
Bezel
I0027
Figure 7-3 Bank Note Acceptor with open Upper Guide
The lower guide assembly provides the lower half of the note channel which steers
the note onto the drive belts and pressure rollers. The lower guide also supports
and locates additional validation circuitry and the magnetic read head. The guide
assembly is integrated into the housing assembly, and the unit is factory aligned to
the upper guide for accurate sensing operations.
Bank Note Stacker

The stacker assembly (see Figure 7-4) is a sturdy, locked steel box capable of
storing 500 stacked currency notes.
Access to the stored notes is only possible via the belly panel door and then
unlocking the hinged, steel, stacker cage door with a security key. The message
DOOR OPEN: BILL STACKER displays on the screen when the belly panel is
opened. A further message, STACKER REMOVED displays when the stacker
cage door is lowered and the communications link to the bank note acceptor is
broken.
The stacker features a self-aligning connector that provides electrical connection
and aligns the stacker to the bank note acceptor.
The interior of the stacker contains a spring loaded pressure plate which supports
the note stack and a pair of note support rails on which presented notes lie prior to
the stacking operation. The front surface of the stacker incorporates a handle and
a clear plastic label retainer.
7-6 Revision 01
Spring Loaded
Pressure Plate
Compartment
for Cassette
Handle Controls and
Electronics
Stacker Drive
Mechanism
Clear Plastic Blind Mate

Label Connector
Container and
Memory Module
I0071
Hinged Steel Door
and Lock
Figure 7-4 Stacker
An upper cavity is created in the box which contains the stacker drive mechanism
sealed from the note compartment. The compartment contains a blind mate
connector to the bank note acceptor, and the memory module for electronically
storing stacker identification, diagnostic and content information.
A motor/pusher plate assembly within the stacker accomplishes note stacking.
The unit consists of a motor driven, slider-crank mechanism. On receipt of the
appropriate signal from the bank note acceptor, the motor turns through one
revolution which cycles the pusher plate through one complete linear extension-
retraction cycle. On extension, the pusher plate moves the note past the note
support rail against the pressure plate. On retraction, the note is trapped below the
support rail and held there by the pressure plate.
Security
The note stacker is fitted with a lock, and two additional locks may be fitted to the
stacker cage door. A communications link between the note stacker and the bank
note acceptor is monitored by the machine software. When the stacker cage door
is lowered to gain access to the stacker, this link is broken and the machine will
lock up with the error message Bill Stacker Removed being displayed on the
screen.
Note Entry
Operation commences when a note of a suitable denomination, as indicated on the
note entry display, is inserted in the bank note acceptor. The note may be inserted
either end first and either face up. The unit grips the inserted note and moves it
over the magnetic head and optical system.
Revision 01 7-7
The note is evaluated and either accepted or rejected. If the note is accepted,
credits are issued only after the note has exited the bank note acceptor and reached
the security stacker. If the note is rejected, it is returned to the player.
A note should only be given three read attempts before it is classed as unreadable.
Bet 1 Bet 2 Bet 3 Bet 5 Bet 10

Collect Credit Credits Credits Credits Credits
Per Line Per Line Per Line Per Line Per Line
20
Play 1 Play 9 10
Line Play 3 Play 5 Play 7 Lines Take Gamble
Reserve 5
Lines Lines Lines Win
RED BLACK
I0066
Figure 7-5 Typical Mid Trim Layout
Electronics Assembly
The electronics assembly provides the intelligence that controls all functional,
validation, communications, diagnostic, and display functions. The bank note
acceptor electronics consists of a microprocessor board mounted on the main
board. The assembly is mounted on the electronics tray, which can be removed
for repair and replacement. The electronics tray also serves as a mount for a self-
aligning connector that electronically connects the bank note acceptor to the
stacker.
The main electronics board contains the input connector (see Figure 7-6) which
connects to the host machine, the top-accessed DIP switch for bank note acceptor
functional setup, and the status LED display.
Figure 7-7 displays a block diagram of the bank note acceptor interconnection
with other assemblies.
Microcontroller
The microcontroller is a Dallas Semiconductor 5000 configured as an integrated
assembly mounted on a SIMM printed circuit board with a 10-year battery-backed
32 kbytes RAM, and a real time clock. The microcontroller runs at 16 MHz
enabling a range of advanced functions to be implemented.
7-8 Revision 01
-24 VDC / POWER 13 1 GROUND
+24 VDC / POWER 14 2 INTERRUPT
OUT OF SERVICE 15 3 DATA
SERIAL / PULSE SEL 16 4 $1 CREDIT
SEND 17 5 ACCEPT ENABLE
ACCOUNT NUMBER 18 6 RS-232 GROUND
PROGRAM 19 7 RS-232 TXD
CREDIT OUT 20 8 RS-232 RXD
CREDIT COMMON 21 9 TTL RXD
CREDIT RELAY 22 10 TTL TXD
CREDIT RELAY 23 11 LED POWER / ANODE
ENABLE IN 24 12 ENABLE COMMON
I0069
Figure 7-6 Input/Output Connector
Lower
Microprocessor Guide
Board Optics
72 Pin SIMM Connector PCB
2 x 6 Way
Connectors
Bank Note Acceptor
Main Board Lower
Magentic
18 Way Guide 10 Pin
Read Head
Ribbon Interface Piggy
PCB
PCB Back
12 Way 2 x 5 Way Self
Connector Aligning Connectors
Power
Note 12 Way Self Supply Bezel
Stacker Aligning PCB PCB
Connector
6 Way 10 Way
Connector Ribbon
Upper
Electric
Guide
Motor
Optics
PCB
I0070
Figure 7-7 Interconnection Diagram
Revision 01 7-9
Scanning System
The scanning transport mechanics consist of a continuous belt and a pressure
roller configuration. The belts are organised to provide an area of optical
inspection within the currency channel so that vertical and horizontal inspections
are possible. The horizontal analysis is performed by the Side Looking Sensors
(SLS) and is used exclusively for the detection of tails and/or strings attached to
bank notes or coupons. Any unusual activity detected by the SLS system is cause
for automatic rejection and reporting.
Stacker
Housed within the stacker is a special memory device that has a serial
communications interface and is supported by a 10-year lithium battery for non-
volatile memory storage. The memory can be interrogated by a proprietary system
when the stacker is inserted into a special purpose external cradle. This facility is
not used in NSW.
Intelligent Bezel.
The bezel assembly is mounted to the uppermost portion of the upper guide
assembly. The assembly provides currency alignment and guidance into the bank
note acceptor transport mechanism
To facilitate the player recognition of the note insertion area, eight green LEDs
flash in a runway type effect when the machine is in idle mode. A ninth, red
LED flashes if the bank note acceptor operation is inhibited for any reason.
Selected green LEDs flash to indicate machine conditions requiring attention. See
Machine Condition Indicators in this chapter.
$1
$2
$5
$10
$20
$50
I0089
Figure 7-8 Bezel Assembly Indicators - LED Displays
7.1.3 VFM4 Non-isolated Serial Interface

The serial communication protocol used to interface with the bank note acceptor
derives from the Mars GL5 standard and is referred to as VFM4. This interface
provides one-way communications with the control system where messages are
sent, via the DATA line, from the bank note acceptor to the EGM in response to
7-10 Revision 01
the control lines. Three control lines are used, ACCEPT, SEND (from the control
system to the bank note acceptor), and INTERRUPT from the bank note acceptor
to the EGM.
In normal operation, the EGM activates the ACCEPT line by pulling it low, and
the bank note acceptor is ready to accept money. After the validation process, a
DENOMINATION message for successful evaluation or a REJECT message for
unsuccessful processing is ready to be sent to the control system.
The bank note acceptor pulls the INTERRUPT line low and informs the EGM of
its intention to send a message. The control system responds by dropping the
SEND line low which grants permission to the bank note acceptor to send data.
After the SEND line becomes low, data comes out via the DATA line in a serial
fashion with 1 start bit, 8 data bits and 1 stop bit, at 600 baud rate. After the
control system receives the last bit it raises the SEND LINE high. The bank note
acceptor responds by raising the INTERRUPT line high which completes the
transmission of the first message.
T6
ACCEPT
T5
INTERRUPT
T1 T3
SEND
T2 T4
DATA 600 BAUD
8-BIT DATA
First message Second message Third message
DENOMINATION VEND/RETURN if stacker full or
or REJECT if note is accepted cannot stack
after note is VEND
I0072
Figure 7-9 VFM4 Protocol - Accept and Return Messages
Should the validation be successful, a DENOMINATION message is sent to the

control system which then has to determine whether to accept or return the note.
If the note is going to be returned, the control system raises the ACCEPT line after
the INTERRUPT line goes high, and keeps the ACCEPT line high for a time.
This state tells the bank note acceptor to return the note. The rejection occurs
when the bank note acceptor reverses the transport and returns the note with the
RETURNED message.
Revision 01 7-11
If the control system decides to accept the note, the absence of the RETURNED
pulse on the ACCEPT line is interpreted by the bank note acceptor as an
acceptance. The note then passed through the transport system to the stacker with
the message VEND.
In both cases, a second message, RETURN or VEND, is ready to be sent to the
control system by the bank note acceptor, and the same timing sequence is
repeated for the control lines. The communication session then ends.
A possible third message, STACKER FULL or FAILURE (the bank note acceptor
and stacker cannot stack a note) can be sent to the control system, and the timing
sequence is repeated for the message. The communication session then ends.
GL5 HEX CODE MESSAGES
$1 CREDIT 81H
$2 CREDIT 82H
$ 5 CREDIT 83H
$ 10 CREDIT 84H
$ 20 CREDIT 85H
$ 50 CREDIT 86H
$ 100 CREDIT 87H
VEND 89H
RETURNED 8AH
REJECT 8BH
FAILURE 8CH
STACKER FULL 8DH
JAM-STACKERLESS 8DH
SRC STACKER REMOVED 8EH
SRC STACKER ATTACHED 8FH
Figure 7-10 VFM4 Protocol - Hex Code Messages
7-12 Revision 01
7.2 Installation and Machine Conditions
7.2.1 Configuration Setup

Machine configuration options are established by the use of DIP switches and the
Operator Mode Menu settings.
Note
The DIP switches are pre-set by the
manufacturer and should not be altered.
The main function of the DIP switches is to set the accepted note denominations.
They are located at the top of the bank note acceptor housing and are accessible
when the main door is opened.
The required note denominations must also be set through the Operator Mode
Menu. The settings for accepted note denominations are found in the Operator
Mode Menu Operator Setup / Selections Menu Machine Options (see 7-11
and refer to the chapter Machine Modes for more information).
Disabling of note denominations should be carried out through the operator menu
options.
MACHINE OPTIONS
-
MACHINE ID 332280 Accept $1 Notes NO -
BASE CREDIT VALUE $0.10 Accept $5 Notes YES -
TOKEN VALUE $1.00 Accept $10 Notes YES -
PERCENTAGE VARIATION 99 87.843 % Accept $20 Notes YES -
COLLECT LIMIT $50.00 Accept $50 Notes NO -
HOPPER REFILL $100.00 Accept $100 Notes NO -
GAMBLE YES Enable Note Acceptor YES -
Figure 7-11 Operator Setup Mode - Machine Options
The mid trim provides players with a panel that identifies the accepted note
denominations.
7.2.2 Machine Condition Indicators

The bank note acceptors operational details are indicated by the intelligent bezel
displays on the mid trim and by several Operator Mode menu displays. The alarm
sounds for error conditions.
Intelligent Bezel Indicators.

The intelligent bezel displays eight green LEDs (2 rows of four, with a wide to
narrow shape) which flash in a runway type effect when the machine is in idle
mode of operation. A ninth, red LED (behind a circle, slash character, and $ sign)
will flash if the bank note acceptor operation is inhibited for any reason.
Revision 01 7-13
Malfunctions flash different rows of the green LEDs. The pair of LEDs nearest
the player is row number 1. The pair nearest the note entry channel is row number
4. The bezel error messages are:
Row 1: Hardware fault. Row 2: Stacker full.
Row 3: Jam in stacker. Row 4: Jam in currency channel.
Operator Mode Menu Indicators

Several Operator Mode menu displays provide bank note acceptor information
that addresses note entry history, machine status, accounting/audit/statistics data,
and error and lockup information (refer to the chapter Machine Modes for further
information).
7-14 Revision 01
CAUTION
Ensure the power is turned off before any
maintenance procedures are carried out on
the bank note acceptor, stacker and dual
cage doors.
CAUTION
The Bank Note Acceptor is controlled by
complex electronics. Unqualified personnel
must not interfere with the unit.
A feature of the Aristocrat bank note acceptor gaming machine is the method of
housing the bank note acceptor. The unit is positioned within a dual cage
assembly which supports the retaining pins located on each side of the bank note
acceptor assembly (see Figure 7-1). Electrical connection is through a single
connector which supplies both power and communications. The connector is
easily accessed from the side of the unit when the main door is open.
Connection to the bank note stacker is automatically made through a blind mate
connector located at the bottom of the bank note acceptor unit.
7.3.1 Clearing the Bank Note Stacker

The procedure for clearing the bank note stacker is strictly controlled by the house
management.
The stacker can be accessed and removed independently from the bank note
assembly by following the procedures outlined in this section.
Removal
To remove the stacker:
1. Open the main door and turn the machine power OFF.
2. Open the belly panel door.
3. Unlock and pull down the stacker cage door. The lock up Stacker Removed
message occurs.
4. Hold the stacker handle and withdraw the stacker from the machine.
5. After the stacker is withdrawn, the stacker door must be unlocked before the
notes can be withdrawn. Each stacker may be numbered to assist accounting
and control operations.
Replacement
To replace the stacker:
1. Lock the stacker door and insert the stacker in the inner cage.
Revision 01 7-15
2. Close and lock the stacker cage door; close and lock the belly panel door.
3. Turn the machine power ON; close and lock the main door.
7.3.2 Bank Note Acceptor Assembly

Removal
To remove the bank note acceptor assembly:
2. Remove the 24 way connector from the left hand side of the assembly.
3. Remove the two screws from the bottom of the assembly that secure the
locking plate to the cage and remove the locking plate.
4. Unclamp the bank note acceptor outer cage top catch and pivot the assembly
forward.
5. Carefully lift the assembly up and out of the machine.
Replacement
To replace the bank note acceptor assembly:
1. Insert the assembly so that the dual cage location and pivot rest on the
holding cradle.
2. Push the assembly back ensuring it clicks into place.
3. Reconnect the connector.
4. Replace the locking plate over the dual cage location & pivot and secure
with the two screws.
7.3.3 Clearing Bank Note Acceptor Jams

If a jam occurs, the unit is usually able to clear itself within a short period as an
automatic process comes into effect. The unit runs the motor forward and then
reverses in an attempt to clear the jam. This routine continues for five attempts -
should the jam persist, a fault message is initiated and a machine lock-up occurs.
The scanning and transport channel of the bank note acceptor passes currency in a
direct process to the stacker. Should a note become lodged within the scanning
channel, see Figures 7-1 and 7-3 and complete the following steps to clear the
jam:
2. Unclamp the bank note acceptor outer cage top catch and pivot assembly
forward.
3. Open the upper guide by pushing it forward to release it from the metal
channel clip at the top of the acceptor and remove any obstruction.
4. If this does not clear the jam, the acceptor will need to be removed from the
housing to enable complete access to the unit.
5. Remove the connector from the left hand side of the assembly.
6. Unclip the retaining clips, carefully lift up the assembly and manoeuvre it
out of the housing; remove any obstructions in the acceptor or on top of the
stacker box.
7-16 Revision 01
To replace the bank note acceptor:
1. Close the upper guide and manoeuvre the unit back into the housing so that it
rests on the retainer grooves.
2. Secure the unit with the retaining clips.
3. Push the assembly back ensuring it clicks into place.
4. Reconnect the connector.
Revision 01 7-17
7.4 Care and Maintenance
7.4.1 Troubleshooting
The following guide provides possible solutions to faults that may be encountered
during normal use. Also refer to Removal and Replacement in this chapter.
Table 7-1 Bank Note Acceptor Fault Finding

Fault Remedy
Note jammed in unit Open the scanning channel and remove the note.
Note repeatedly skews and Pressure rollers have incorrect tension. Belts are not
jams adjusted properly. Make adjustments to the roller
tension and transport belts.
Display electronics are non The bank note acceptor may not be receiving power.
functional Ensure that all leads are correctly connected and
power has been turned on.
Note is not transported into The bank note acceptor may not be receiving power.
the unit Reconnect the power.
There may be a jam in the scanning channel. Remove
the note from the channel.
The bank note acceptor has been inhibited from
further operation by the game and machine software.
Remove any current machine locks. See Machine
Modes.
The note denomination has been disabled. Check the
Machine Options in the Operator Setup menu. If
problem persists check the DIP switches (see Figure
Figure 7-12.
Low acceptance rate Perform a Video Level Calibration
7-18 Revision 01
DIP Switches
OFF OFF
ON ON
1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10
Bank Note
Acceptor
I0127
Figure 7-12 Bank Note Acceptor - DIP Switch Location
Table 7-2 Bank Note Acceptor DIP Switch Functions

Switch Position Function
1 ON Enable $100 notes.
OFF Disable $100 notes.
2 ON Enable $5 note.
OFF Disable $5 note.
6 ON No function.
OFF
7 ON Display last 5 notes.
OFF Standard mode.
8 ON No function.
OFF
9 ON Service mode for video level calibration.
OFF Normal mode.
10 ON High level protocol.
OFF VFM4 protocol mode.
Revision 01 7-19
7.4.2 Periodic Maintenance

The bank note acceptor and stacker require only a minimal amount of maintenance
which can be provided while the units are in operating positions.
Occasional wiping of the plastic bezel surface is all that is required to remove
surface deposits and smudges. A soft lint-free cloth dampened with a 90%
solution of isopropyl alcohol is recommended for cleaning.
Caution
Caution must be exercised not to flood the
bezel area with liquids due to the electronics
in the bezel unit and because liquids must
not seep down into the bank note acceptor
units below the bezel area.
Do not use a solvent other than isopropyl
alcohol as permanent damage to the bezel
assembly and other items may result.
Over a period of time, dirt from the surface of the notes will accumulate on the
pressure rollers, drive belt surfaces and bank note acceptor optics. These areas
should be cleaned to ensure reliable operation.
To clean rollers, belt surfaces, and validation optics, proceed as follows:
1. Remove the bank note acceptor as described in Clearing Bank Note Jams in
this chapter.
2. Using a soft lint-free cloth dampened with 90% isopropyl alcohol, wipe the
note channel surfaces on both the upper and lower guides to remove any
surface dirt. Pay particular attention to the optics area and the magnetic
head when removing deposits from the surfaces.
3. On the upper guide assembly, clean the surface of the pressure rollers. The
belt surface may be cleaned by using a thumb to rotate one of the drive
rollers while holding the cleaning cloth against the surface of the belt.
Again, caution should be used to prevent excess liquid from reaching the
bank note acceptor internals.
7.4.3 Video Level Calibration

Should the bank note acceptor exhibit an unusually low level of acceptance, a
video level calibration can be performed as described below.
Video Level reference paper (Part No. CBV-1000) is required for this procedure.
Do not use any other paper to perform this procedure.
Video Adjustment Procedure
1. Apply power to the EGM and ensure the bank note acceptor runway lights
are operating normally.
2. Locate the DIP switches at the top of the bank note acceptor (see Figure 7-
12) and turn DIP switch 9 ON (away from the front bezel).
7-20 Revision 01
Note
Step 4. must be executed within 5 seconds
of Step 3.
3. Open and then close the currency channel.

4. Within five seconds of step 3. above, insert the video level calibration paper
into the note entry area.
5. The bank note acceptor will draw the paper in and step it out as it performs
the video calibration. The procedure is complete when the paper is fully
ejected.
6. Turn DIP switch 9 OFF.
7. Open and then close the currency channel.
8. Test the operation of the bank note acceptor.
Revision 01 7-21
Notes
7-22 Revision 01
NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual Hopper
________Chapter 8________
Hopper
8.1 Technical Description ...................................................................... 8-3

8.1.2 Basic Operation.......................................................................... 8-6
8.1.3 Functional Description................................................................ 8-7
8.1.4 Hopper Interface Signals............................................................ 8-7
8.2 Removal and Replacement .............................................................. 8-8
8.2.1 Removal ..................................................................................... 8-8

8.2.2 Replacement .............................................................................. 8-8
8.3 Clearing Coin Jams .......................................................................... 8-9
8.4 Disassembly and Assembly........................................................... 8-10
8.4.1 Disassembly ............................................................................. 8-10

8.4.2 Assembly.................................................................................. 8-11
8.5 Fault Finding ................................................................................... 8-12
Revision 01 8-1
Hopper NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual
List of Figures
Figure 8-1 Hopper Location (Standard Disc Hopper shown)................................................ 8-3
Figure 8-2 Hopper- rear view (Standard Disc Hopper Shown)............................................ 8-4
Figure 8-3 Hopper - exploded view (Standard Disc Hopper Shown)................................... 8-5
Figure 8-4 Hopper Photo-optic Detector............................................................................. 8-13
List of Tables
Table 8-1 Fault Finding....................................................................................................... 8-12
8-2 Revision 01

The Mk4/5XR machine is fitted with a short bowl Aristocrat Disc Hopper (ADH).
The hopper components and operating procedures are the same as the standard
Aristocrat Disc Hopper (see Figures 8-1 and 8-2).
The hopper is mounted onto a base plate that slides into the base of the cabinet
and is locked in position by a spring-loaded release pin. When the hopper is
pushed into position, the socket automatically connects to the plug on the cabinet
base. The socket is wired to the hopper PCB, which controls the hopper.
The hopper PCB drives a 24 V DC motor, which rotates the disc within the hopper
through the gearbox. The motor and gearbox is one assembly and cannot be
replaced separately.
Probe
Hopper Coin Chute Handle Cover
Bowl
Cabinet
I0134
Guide
Side Handle Hopper Platform
Guide
Spring-loaded Pin
Figure 8-1 Hopper Location (Standard Disc Hopper shown)
Revision 01 8-3
Photo-optic Detector
(Position X)
(Position Y)
Disc Housing
Second Coin
Wiper Leaf Spring
Disc & Spindle
Housing
Drive Boss
Plug
Hopper PCB
M5 Nut (4)
M4 Screw &
Washer (2)
Motor
M4 Bolt & Spring
Drive Pin Washer (4)
Motor/Gearbox
Mounting Bracket
Gearbox
Motor PCB
& Loom
I0133
Figure 8-2 Hopper- rear view (Standard Disc Hopper Shown)
Hopper Parts
The stationary parts of the hopper (see Figure 8-3) are:
The casting - with gearbox, side handle, and motor attached.
The casting plate - which is bolted to the casting with one fixed and three
spring-loaded bolts.
The bowl - with handle, internal baffles, coin slider, and probe which is secured
to the casting plate.
8-4 Revision 01
Handle Cover
I0135
Revision 01
(Position Y) Second Coin Cover Fixing Screw
Wipe-off Spring, & Washer (3)
Screw, Washer (2)
Upper Baffle
Second Coin Wiper Hopper Bowl Upper Baffle
Leaf Spring, Screw (2) Mounting Fixing Screw (4)
Fixed Bolt
Bowl
Lower Baffle
Coin Wiper
Disc Pins
Pawl, Screw & Coin Stirrer

Disc
Washer Spigot
Position X
Photo-optic Dectector
(Position Y), Screw (2)
Coin Runner
Coin Slider
Side Handle
Coin Runner Central
Retaining Nut & Probe - Connector,
Spindle Bolt
Washers (2) Brass Screw, Washers (2)
Insulating Washers (2),
Handle and Baffle Plastic Bush Coin Slide
Fixing Bolts (4) Spring (2)
Disc Securing
Bowl Fixing
Screw (4)
Screw, Washer
Figure 8-3 Hopper - exploded view (Standard Disc Hopper Shown)

Hopper Floating Disc & Nut (8)
Hopper Bowl
Coin Chute Mounting Spring Support Bearing (3)
Loaded Bolt, Nut Drive Boss Refuse Opening
Disc Housing & Washer (3)
Hopper Bowl Hopper Platform
Mounting
Hopper
8-5
The moving parts of the hopper, which are rotated by the motor (see Figure 8-3),
are:
the disc.
the spigot.
the coin stirrer.
The hopper PCB transmits two outputs from detectors:

Output to the Main Board from a probe that detects when the hopper is full.
Output to the Main Board from a photo-optic detector, which detects coins as
they are dispensed from the hopper.
The photo-optic detector is mounted in one of two positions, Position X or

Position Y.

The hopper holds and dispenses coins. Coins entering the machine are fed into
the hopper bowl or the cash box chute through the coin handling system. Coins
are fed into the cash box when the hopper is full.
The hopper dispenses coins into the coin tray when the player has credits and
presses the COLLECT pushbutton. Coins are dispensed via the hopper coin chute
which juts out through the slot in the door reflector panel. The hopper can pay out
any number of coins up to the cancel credit amount.
If the player presses the COLLECT pushbutton when the number of coins in credit
is greater than the cancel credit amount, the machine locks up. The credits are paid
as a book pay by the cashier, and the machine must be reset using the Cancel
Credit (Jackpot Reset) key.
If the player presses the COLLECT pushbutton when the number of coins in credit
is below the cancel credit amount but greater than the number of coins in the
hopper, all coins in the hopper are dispensed. The machine then locks up. The
attendant must refill the hopper and reset the machine before the balance of coins
is dispensed.
If the machine pays out too many coins, or not enough, the machine locks up and
cannot be played until the attendant has fixed the problem.
8-6 Revision 01
8.1.3 Functional Description

Coin Dispensing
On receiving a hopper drive signal from the Main Board, the hopper PCB starts
the hopper motor. The motor rotates the disc in an anticlockwise direction.
As the disc turns, the coins are caught between the disc pins and the edge of the
spigot. If there is more than one coin between two pins on the disc, the excess is
cleared by the second coin wipe-off spring. The second coin wiper pawl then
ejects the payout coins from the disc into the hopper coin chute. For each coin
entering the hopper coin chute, the photo-optic detector sends a signal to the Main
Board. The coin runner guides the coins into the hopper coin chute.
Each coin exiting the hopper interrupts the photo-optic detector which sends a
signal to the main board via the hopper PCB and the interface board. The Main
Board counts the optic interrupts and when the correct payout number is reached,
terminates the hopper drive signal to the hopper PCB. The hopper PCB stops the
motor by an electronic braking action. The second coin wiper pawl prevents the
next coin from falling from the hopper disc.
Hopper Full Detection

A probe is fitted onto the hopper bowl to detect a full hopper (see Figure 8-1).
When the coins reach the probe, they create an electrical circuit through the coins
to ground. The probe is monitored by the Main Board. If the probe indicates that
the hopper is full, the software operates the diverter solenoid (situated on the front
of the inner door) which diverts the coins to the cash box. The position of the
probe in the hopper can be adjusted to alter the maximum coin level.
Coin Jamming Prevention

A spigot and coin stirrer, which are friction fitted to the disc, keep the coins
moving in the hopper bowl (see Figure 8-3). In addition, a spring-loaded coin
slider prevents the hopper from jamming due to coin stacking.
Two baffles, secured with spring-loaded bolts, control the coin level in the bowl.
The casting plate is connected to the casting by four bolts. The top bolt is fixed,
but the other three are spring loaded. This is to prevent serious damage to the
casting if there is a large coin jam in the bowl.
The opening on the hopper casting allows dirt and foreign objects to escape.
In the event of a coin jam, the motor will automatically stop and then restart after
about eight seconds. If this does not remove the jam:
the motor automatically stops.
the machine locks up.
the software displays a fault message on the video monitor.
8.1.4 Hopper Interface Signals

The Aristocrat Disc Hopper interfaces with the Main Board via the 14-way Minifit
connector P25 on the Interface Board.
Revision 01 8-7
CAUTION
Always use the handle to lift the hopper.
Never lift the hopper by the motor and the
end of the bowl, as this action may bend the
motor spindle.
CAUTION
Avoid handling the second coin wiper leaf
spring. If bent, it may cause an incorrect
coin payout and the machine to lock out.
8.2.1 Removal
To remove the hopper from the cabinet:
2. Lift the spring-loaded pin.
3. Slide the hopper out of the machine.
4. Lift the hopper by its handle.
Note
A Fault Tag must be placed on any faulty
equipment.
8.2.2 Replacement
To replace the hopper in the cabinet:
1. Lift the hopper by its handle and slide it into the guides in the base of the
cabinet.
2. Ensure that the spring-loaded pin is engaged in the retaining hole.
3. Switch ON the machine; close and lock the cabinet door.
Note
The hopper should be tested after replacing.
To test the hopper, follow the hopper test
procedure outlined in the Machine Modes
section.
8-8 Revision 01
8.3 Clearing Coin Jams
If a coin passes the hopper photo-optic detector when the player has not pressed
the COLLECT button or is not entitled to a payout, the machine locks up and
displays the fault message ILLEGAL COIN OUT. If a coin jams in the hopper
photo-optic detector, the machine locks up and displays the fault message
HOPPER JAMMED.
CAUTION
Avoid handling the second coin wiper spring.
If bent, it may cause an incorrect coin
payout.
To clear these lockups, take the following action:

2. Clear any jammed coins from the coin chute and near the hopper photo-optic
detectors (see Figure 8-4).
3. Check that the hopper coin chute is correctly aligned with the slot in the
door mounting panel.
4. Switch ON the machine; close and lock the cabinet door.
5. Turn the Jackpot Reset key ON then OFF to reset the machine.
Revision 01 8-9
8.4 Disassembly and Assembly
8.4.1 Disassembly
To disassemble the hopper (see Figure 8-3):
1. Remove the bowl assembly:
a. Remove the four spring-loaded bolts that attach the casting plate to the
base of the hopper.
b. Disconnect the hopper probe at the side of the bowl.
c. Remove the photo-optic detector and the fixed bolt that restrains the
wire to the detector.
d. Pull away the bowl (still attached to the casting plate) from the base of
the hopper.
2. Remove the two coin runner retaining nuts.
3. Remove the hopper coin chute.
CAUTION
If shims are fitted under the coin runner,
ensure they are not damaged when
removing the coin runner or coin chute. Do
not discard the shims.
4. Remove the coin runner.

5. Remove the second coin wiper pawl.
6. Remove the second coin wipe-off spring.
CAUTION
Ensure that the spring-loaded bearings do
not fall out from their mountings in the
casting when removing the disc.
7. Remove the disc:

a. Remove the centre bolt that holds the disc assembly in place.
b. Remove the coin stirrer and spigot.
c. Remove the four securing screws from the centre of the disc and
withdraw the disc from the drive boss.
8. To remove the motor/gearbox unit (refer to Fig 8-3) and:
a. Disconnect the motor PCB and loom from the hopper PCB.
b. Remove the nuts securing the motor/gearbox mounting bracket to the
disc and spindle housing.
c. Tap out the drive pin, and remove the bolts securing the
motor/gearbox unit to the bracket.
8-10 Revision 01
8.4.2 Assembly
To assemble the hopper:
1. Replace the disc:
a. Slide the drive shaft end of the disc into the drive boss, ensuring the
slot on the shaft engages with the drive pin in the gearbox.
b. Insert the four securing screws in the centre of the disc and tighten.
c. Place the second coin wiper pawl in position. Insert the screws and
tighten.
d. Place the second coin wiper spring in position. Insert the two securing
set screws and tighten.
e. Place the spigot and coin stirrer in position.
f. Insert the centre bolt through the centre hole of the spigot and coin
stirrer and tighten onto the drive boss.
g. Place the coin runner on the two studs. Screw on the two nuts and
washers, but do not tighten. Locate the point of the coin runner as
close as possible to the spigot without rubbing, and ensure free
running of the disc underneath the coin runner. Use shims if required.
h. Slide the hopper coin chute under the two bolts holding the coin
runner and tighten the nuts.
2. Replace the bowl assembly:
a. Place the bowl assembly (still attached to the casting plate) in position
on base of the hopper.
b. Insert the four spring-loaded bolts into the casting plate and tighten.
c. Place the photo-optic detector in position, insert the screw and tighten.
d. Place the fixed bolt in position so that it restrains the wire for the
photo-optic detector, and tighten the bolt.
Note
The hopper should be tested after servicing.
To test the hopper, follow the hopper test
procedure outlined in the Machine Modes
section.
Revision 01 8-11
8.5 Fault Finding
Fault Probable Cause Action

Too many coins being The leaf spring holding Tighten the leaf spring fixing screws
dispensed and the the second coin wiper or replace the spring.
machine locks up. pawl is bent or loose.
Hopper not working. A. No power is supplied. 1. Check that power is supplied to
the hopper.
B. Faulty connector. 2. Check that the connector is not
damaged and is correctly seated.
C. Hopper is not in the 3. Check the hopper mounting
correct location. spring-loaded bolt is in the correct
position.
D. Motor is faulty. 4. Replace the motor and gearbox
assembly.
Coins jamming at the top Coin runner is loose or Place the coin runner point as close
of the coin chute. not in the correct position. as possible to the disc and tighten
the securing nuts. Also check if the
shims are damaged..
Coins stacking at the Bottom coin slide springs Check that the springs are hooked
bottom of the bowl. are not secure. into the hopper spring fixing holes.
8-12 Revision 01

For the general maintenance of the hopper, see Figure 8-4 and:
1. Clean the hopper photo-optic detector. Dirt can accumulate on the detector
over a prolonged period, resulting in faulty coin counting. Remove any dust
from the photo-optic detector using a soft paint brush or by blowing through
a drinking straw.
2. Check that the second coin wipe-off spring has not been bent away from the
second coin wiper pawl. Replace if necessary.
Hopper Photo-optic
Second Coin
Wipe-off Spring
I0179
Figure 8-4 Hopper Photo-optic Detector
Revision 01 8-13
Notes
8-14 Revision 01
NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual Video Monitor
________Chapter 9________
Video Monitor
9.1 Ceronix Monitor - General Description................................... 9-3
9.2 Technical Description .............................................................. 9-4
9.2.1 Power Supply ............................................................................. 9-4

9.2.2 Adjustment Procedures.............................................................. 9-4
9.3 Removal and Replacement...................................................... 9-6
9.4 General Maintenance ............................................................... 9-6
9.5 Degaussing............................................................................... 9-7
Revision 01 9-1
Video Monitor NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual
List of Figures
Figure 9-1 Ceronix Video Monitor and Control Panel ......................................................9-5
9-2 Revision 01
9.1 Ceronix Monitor - General Description

The video monitor assembly consists of a metal chassis manufactured by
Aristocrat, a cathode ray tube from RCA Thompson or Philips, and electronics
supplied by Ceronix. For full servicing details refer to the manufacturers manual.
The video monitor is a 20" (51 cm) VGA type capable of up to 640 x 480 pixel
resolution (the resolution used is 640 x 400 pixels). The major components of the
video monitor assembly are the cathode ray tube (CRT), the video monitor printed
circuit boards (PCBs) and the video monitor chassis. The monitor assembly also
includes an isolation transformer because it can not run directly from the mains
supply.
The CRT and video PCBs are all mounted onto a common metal chassis that
slides along the game display shelf into the cabinet. The video monitor assembly
is secured in place by a single screw, inserted from the underside of the game
display shelf.
The slide-in chassis system enables the video monitor assembly to be removed and
replaced easily, and also to connect to the rest of the machine via a single, self-
aligning, multi-pin connector on the back of the chassis. This connector transmits
the monitor power and the video drive signals from the video controller, which is
built into the ARM250 microprocessor.
The PCBs associated with the monitor assembly are (see Figure 9-1):
Picture Control PCB
Main Monitor Chassis PCB
CRT Neckboard PCB
The Picture Control PCB provides for picture adjustment and is located at the
front of the monitor assembly for easy access.
Revision 01 9-3

For a full technical description, refer to separate Ceronix service manual.
9.2.1 Power Supply

The Ceronix monitor requires isolated mains input which is supplied by an
isolated transformer box mounted on the inside of the monitor chassis. A power
supply regulator circuit converts the isolated mains input to the voltages required
by the monitor.
9.2.2 Adjustment Procedures

The Picture Control PCB is located at the front of the monitor assembly for easy
access. It provides the following controls and adjustments for the monitor picture.
Horizontal Raster size
Vertical Raster size
Vertical Picture position
Horizontal Picture position
Video Gain (Contrast)
These controls can be adjusted only to a limited amount. The brightness will be
maintained throughout the life of the unit by the auto-brightness circuit.
All colours are automatically adjusted by the auto bias circuit and will remain
constant throughout the life of the unit.
Pincushion distortion is automatically adjusted using the auto bias circuit.
9-4 Revision 01
CRT Earth CRT Anode

Strap
CRT Neckboard
PCB
Monitor
Chassis
Monitor
Main Monitor Self-aligning
CRT Chassis PCB Connector
Picture Control PCB

I0105
HORIZONTAL
SIZE
VERTICAL
SIZE
VERTICAL
POSITION
HORIZONTAL
POSITION
MASTER GAIN
(CONTRAST)
Figure 9-1 Ceronix Video Monitor and Control Panel
Revision 01 9-5

To remove the monitor assembly from the machine:
WARNING
High voltages are present at the rear of the
monitor when the machine is ON. Switch
OFF the machine before removing the
monitor.
WARNING
The monitor assembly is a heavy item
(approximately 20 kg). Care should be
taken when removing the monitor assembly
to prevent personal injury or damage to the
monitor.
To remove the monitor:

2. Remove the two bolts from the underside of the game display shelf.
3. Gently pull the monitor assembly from the machine. The steel frame of the
monitor assembly has openings at either side to facilitate handling.

For general maintenance of the video monitor:
Remove any dust or dirt from external surfaces.
Clean the monitor screen with a soft cloth and suitable cleaning agents.
Check that all connectors are secure.
Check that all monitor assembly PCBs are secure and properly connected.
Check that the monitor and monitor mask fit correctly when the cabinet door
is closed.
9-6 Revision 01
9.5 Degaussing
Magnetic interference can cause colour aberrations on the monitor screen. To
restore the colour purity of the monitor picture, the monitor and cabinet need to be
degaussed.
Note that the monitor colour aberrations can occur due to normal delivery
movements, installation operations, and through leaving the main door open
during power-up processes.
The monitor assembly is fitted with an automatic degaussing coil and circuitry that
emits a degaussing pulse during power up, provided the machine has been without
power for 30 minutes. This time delay enables the circuit varistors to cool
sufficiently and create enough energy to degauss both the monitor's ferrous
content and the cabinet.
To carry out degaussing:
1. Power down the machine and wait for a 30-minute period to elapse. This
time delay enables the monitor circuit varistors to cool sufficiently and
create enough energy to degauss both the monitor's ferrous content and that
of the cabinet.
2. Power up the machine and close the door within 5 seconds. Automatic
degaussing will now occur.
3. If the aberration persists due to the presence of a particularly strong
magnetic field, it will be necessary to make use of a degaussing wand.
Follow the standard field procedures for degaussing-wand usage.
Revision 01 9-7
Notes
9-8 Revision 01
NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual Electromechanical Meters
______Chapter 10______
Electromechanical Meters
10.1 General Description ............................................................... 10-3
10.2 Functional Description .......................................................... 10-4
10.2.1 Serial Interface ......................................................................... 10-4

10.2.2 Overcurrent Protection ............................................................. 10-5
10.2.3 Meter Drive Outputs ................................................................. 10-5
10.2.4 PCB Expansion ........................................................................ 10-5
10.2.5 Light Tower Interface ............................................................... 10-5
10.2.6 Security Interface ..................................................................... 10-5
10.2.7 Meter Detection ........................................................................ 10-5
10.4 Connector Pin Assignment ................................................... 10-8
10.5 General Maintenance ........................................................... 10-10
Revision 01 10-1
Electromechanical Meters NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual
List of Figures:
Figure 10-1 Electromechanical Meter Board - Location ................................................10-3
Figure 10-2 Electromechanical Meter Board - 410366 Block Diagram .........................10-4
Figure 10-3 Electromechanical Meter Board - 410366 Component and Solder
Sides ...............................................................................................................10-6
List of Tables
Table 10-1 J1 - Main Connector to Interface Board ......................................................10-8
Table 10-2 J2 - Meter Drive Output Interface ................................................................10-8
Table 10-3 J3 - Additional Meters Interface...................................................................10-9
Table 10-4 J4 - Light Tower Interface............................................................................10-9
Table 10-5 S1 - Security Interface.................................................................................10-9
10-2 Revision 01
10.1 General Description

The Electromechanical Meter Board is mounted to the reflector panel in the top
box (see Figure 10-1) or in the low boy meter cover when there is no top box. It is
a conventional double sided PCB connected to the Main Board using a 26-way
ribbon cable via the Interface Board.
The PCB provides physical location for up to nine electromechanical meters and
connection for a further seven. (For a listing of the function of the meters, refer to
Chapter 3, Machine Modes). There are 16 meter outputs which can be configured
to drive various components. Eight outputs are used for the standard set of
meters. The ninth drive is reserved. The remaining seven outputs are open to
configuration. The PCB also acts as an interface for security, meter drive outputs
and a light tower, if used.
Circuit Diagrams and Component Locations

For further information and for reference, the following additional information on
the Electromechanical Meter Board is provided in Volume II:
Circuit diagrams. Structured circuit diagrams.
I/O to Components and ICs. A list of the I/O paths to each component and
integrated circuit (IC) pin position.
Top Box
Top Trim
Electromechanical
Meters PCB
Monitor
Figure 10-1 Electromechanical Meter Board - Location
Revision 01 10-3
10.2 Functional Description

The functions provided by the Electromechanical Meter Board are as follows (see
Block Diagram Figure 10-2):
Serially interface up to nine electromechanical meters with the Main Board.
Provide overcurrent protection to the meter drivers.
Allow connection to meter drive outputs, backwards compatible with
previous gaming machine models.
Expandable for up to another seven electromechanical meters.
Interface to light tower lamps.
Interface to electromechanical meters security.
Capability for detecting meters connected/disconnected.
Capable of being configured for less than nine electromechanical meters;
allows depopulation of the board.
6-Way Loom
Light Tower
7-Way Loom
Serial Interface Security
Interface
J4 S1
Interface Board Electromechanical
and 26-Way
J1 Meter Board
Main Board Ribbon Cable Meter Drive Outputs
J3 J2 M1 - M6
10-Way Ribbon Cable
10-Way Ribbon Cable Additional Meters

(7 Max.)
Optional
Mk5V130.CDR
Figure 10-2 Electromechanical Meter Board - 410366 Block Diagram
10.2.1 Serial Interface

The Electromechanical Meter Board communicates with the Main Board logic via
the Interface Board. The Main Board sends a stream of data, clocked to the chip,
to the Electromechanical Meter Board. The PCB circuitry reads the data and
increments the appropriate meter. The logic signals from the Main Board are
optically coupled.
The interface also allows for data from the Electromechanical Meter Board to be
sent to the Main Board logic in the event of meter failure, disconnection or
security access.
Connection is via a 26-way ribbon cable header to connector P6 on the Interface
Board.
10-4 Revision 01
10.2.2 Overcurrent Protection

An 'intelligent' power switch is used for switching power on and off through the
meter drive outputs. The power switch used incorporates built-in overcurrent
sensing and protection.
The Texas Instruments TPIC2802 Intelligent-Power switch with over-current
protection is used. Power supply provides 24 VDC 5% for lamps (Is = 1A) and 5
VDC 5% for logic (regulated) (Icc = 100 mA). The logic signals are optically
coupled from the main board and the inputs are connected via a Schmitt Trigger.
The baud rate (bit clock) of the SPI is 8KHz 20%.
10.2.3 Meter Drive Outputs

The meter drive output interface allows the connection of systems requiring
electromechanical meters drive pulses for audit functions. DACOM systems may
be connected to the machine in this way.
Connection is via a 10-way ribbon cable header.
10.2.4 PCB Expansion

An expansion interface has been incorporated into the PCB design to allow an
additional set of up to seven electromechanical meters. These meters can be
configured through the machine software to identify various machine functions.
Connection is via a 10-way ribbon cable header.
10.2.5 Light Tower Interface

When a light tower is used, it is connected to the machine via the interface with
the Electromechanical Meter Board. The PCB directs the lamp control signals
from the Main Board logic (via the Interface Board) to the light tower lamps
through four of the extra seven meter drive outputs.
Connection is via a 6-way wafer connector.
10.2.6 Security Interface

The security interface provides a connection for the Electromechanical Meter
Board to a mechanical security switch for monitoring meter accesses.
Connection is via a 7-way wafer connector.
10.2.7 Meter Detection

Data received from the Main Board logic is written to an output chip and then read
back. If there is a discrepancy between the initial data written and the data read
back, there is a fault. The Electromechanical Meter Board will then inform the
Main Board logic of a malfunction.
Revision 01 10-5
Optional Mechanical
Security Switch
Figure 10-3 Electromechanical Meter Board - 410366 Component and Solder Sides
10-6 Revision 01
CAUTION
When handling electrostatic devices (ESDs)
such as PCBs, take care to avoid physical
contact with components. Handle PCBs by
their edges. Do not place ESD items on
metal surfaces. When handling PCBs, take
care to avoid flexing the PCB. Flexing may
cause physical damage.
From the Top Box

To remove the Electromechanical Meter Board from the top box:
1. Open the cabinet door, and turn OFF the machine.
2. Remove the top box door and reflector panel (refer to the chapter - Cabinet,
Door and Top Box).
3. Disconnect the looms from the Electromechanical Meter Board.
4. Remove the screws securing the board.
Revision 01 10-7
10.4 Connector Pin Assignment
Table 10-1 J1 - Main Connector to Interface Board

Pin Pin Name Function
1 P24VA +24V
2 GND Ground
3 P24VA +24V
4 GND Ground
5 /ESPIDIN2 Data from meter board
6 GNDA Isolated ground
7 ESPIRST2 Reset signal to meter board
9 /ESIOE2 Strobe signal to meter board
10 VCC +5V from main board, converted from 24V
11 ESCLK Serial clock
13 /ESPIDOUT Data output to meter board
15 GND Ground
17 MSS2 Mechanical Security Switch 2 contact - NC
19 MSSO2 Mechanical Security Switch 2 contact - NO
21 EMCS2 Emitter 2 Drive signal, security 2
23 OPRIS2 Receiver 2 Sense signal, security 2
25 GND Ground
26 ---
Table 10-2 J2 - Meter Drive Output Interface

Pin Signal Name Description
1 Meter5 Open collector, active 'low' Vsat 1.8V, 1A max.
4 GND Ground.
6 ---
8 +24VDC + 24V DC supply.
10-8 Revision 01
Table 10-3 J3 - Additional Meters Interface

9 GND Ground.
Table 10-4 J4 - Light Tower Interface

2 Top lamp Open collector, active 'low' Vsat 1.8V, 1A max.
3 Second lamp Open collector, active 'low' Vsat 1.8V, 1A max.
4 Third lamp Open collector, active 'low' Vsat 1.8V, 1A max.
5 Fourth lamp Open collector, active 'low' Vsat 1.8V, 1A max.
Table 10-5 S1 - Security Interface

1 MSS2 Mechanical switch, contact - NC.
2 GND Ground.
3 MSS02 Mechanical switch, contact - NO.
4 EMCS2 Opto LED enable signal.
5 GND Ground.
6 OPRIS2 Opto detector signal.
7 GND Ground.
Revision 01 10-9
CAUTION
Do not attempt component level repair
without access to a workshop facility.
For general maintenance of the Electromechanical Meter Board:

Check that all connectors are in good condition and are secure.
10-10 Revision 01
NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual Main Board
________Chapter 11________
Main Board
410389 - double sided or

410448 single sided
11.1 Introduction..................................................................................... 11-4
11.2 Physical Description ...................................................................... 11-5
11.2.1 Diagrams and Component Locations ....................................... 11-5
11.3 Functional Description.................................................................. 11-6
11.3.1 Main Board Functions .............................................................. 11-7
11.4 Technical Description ................................................................... 11-8
11.4.1 ARM250 Microprocessor........................................................ 11-10

11.4.2 Sound..................................................................................... 11-11
11.4.3 Video ...................................................................................... 11-12
11.4.4 Reset...................................................................................... 11-12
11.4.5 Debug (Keyboard) Port .......................................................... 11-13
11.4.6 Debugging .............................................................................. 11-13
11.4.7 External I/O Expansion........................................................... 11-14
11.4.8 Mikohn Link Progressive Interface (where fitted) ................... 11-14
11.4.9 Memory .................................................................................. 11-15
11.4.10 Real Time Clock..................................................................... 11-16
11.4.11 Battery Backup Circuit............................................................ 11-16
11.4.12 Power Control Interface.......................................................... 11-17
11.4.13 SPI Bus Driver and Multiplexer Circuitry ................................ 11-18
11.4.14 Printer and Mechanical Meters............................................... 11-19
11.4.15 Mechanical Switches.............................................................. 11-19
11.4.16 Security .................................................................................. 11-19
Revision 01 11-1
Main Board NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual
11.4.17 Coin Handling System ............................................................ 11-20

11.4.18 Hopper Interface..................................................................... 11-21
11.4.19 Serial Channels ...................................................................... 11-21
11.4.20 Bank Note Acceptor ............................................................... 11-22
11.4.21 Interface Board....................................................................... 11-22
11.5 Removal and Replacement Procedures..................................... 11-23
11.6 Description of Connectors ........................................................... 11-24
11.6.1 Communications Configuration Board.................................... 11-24

11.6.2 Optically Isolated Connector - P20 ......................................... 11-26
11.6.3 Miscellaneous Connector - P22.............................................. 11-28
11.6.4 Security and I/O Expansion Connector - P21 ......................... 11-30
11-2 Revision 01
List of Figures
Figure 11-1 Location of Main Board ................................................................................... 11-5
Figure 11-2 System Architecture ........................................................................................ 11-6
Figure 11-3 Main Board block diagram .............................................................................. 11-8
Figure 11-4 Typical Main Board layout (not detailed) ......................................................... 11-9
List of Tables
Table 11-1 Serial EEPROMs Characteristics................................................................... 11-16
Table 11-2 Power Control System Signal Lines ............................................................... 11-17
Table 11-3 SPI Channel Signals ...................................................................................... 11-18
Table 11-4 Optical Security Sensor Assignment.............................................................. 11-19
Table 11-5 Mechanical Security Switch Assignment........................................................ 11-20
Table 11-6 Coin Handling Signals .................................................................................... 11-20
Table 11-7 Hopper Control Signals .................................................................................. 11-21
Table 11-8 Communications Configuration Board connector - P23................................. 11-24
Table 11-9 Optically Isolated Connector - P20................................................................. 11-26
Table 11-10 Miscellaneous Connector - P22 ................................................................... 11-28
Table 11-11 Security and I/O Expansion Connector - P21............................................... 11-30
Revision 01 11-3
11.1Introduction
The Main Board provides central control of the gaming machine. The board is
fitted with an ARM RISC microprocessor which interfaces with other equipment
in the machine via the Interface Board.
The machine may be fitted with one of two Main Boards:
Part No. 2501-410389 or 2501-410448.
The main features of the Main Board are as follows:
ARM RISC microprocessor operating at 12 MHz (combines CPU, memory
management, I/O Interface, audio and video on a single chip)
on-board power supply regulator
audio amplifier for speaker
game EPROMS
security monitoring of machine door activities
serial channels
watchdog timer and reset
surface mounted technology
flexible design allows for future changes to the machine configuration.
11-4 Revision 01
11.2Physical Description
The Main Board contains an ARM RISC microprocessor that interfaces with a
number of subsystems via the Interface Board. Figure 11-2 provides a block
diagram illustrating the electronics system architecture. The system is available in
various configurations to meet specific machine requirements.
The Main Board, along with the other major PCBAs, is located within the security
logic cage (see Figure 11-1). The logic cage is a lockable, steel box located
underneath the monitor shelf. It provides security and protection for the PCBAs.
The Main Board slides on guides within the cage and connects directly to the
Interface Board via three 96-way DIN 41612 connectors. Connectors are provided
on the Main Board for the Communications Configuration Board and an optional
memory expansion PCBA.
Logic Cage
Main Board
I/O Driver Board
I/O Expansion Board or

I0076
LAB Communications Board
(if fitted)
Interface Board
Figure 11-1 Location of Main Board
11.2.1 Diagrams and Component Locations

the Main Board is provided in Volume II:
Board Layout. A drawing of the Main Board showing the location of the
components.
Figure 11-4 shows component locations on the Main Board.
Revision 01 11-5

The Main Board interfaces with the following devices (depending on machine
features) via the Interface Board:
MkV Series II I/O Driver Board - Part No. 410415
Video Monitor / Touchscreen
Mechanical Meter Board
Power Supply Assembly
Pushbuttons and Pushbutton Lamps
Animation Lamps
Network Interface
Link Progressive System
Player Marketing Module
Security Devices
Money Management Devices
Printer
Cooling Fan
Mechanical Security Switches
Optical Security Switches
Key Switches
Optional I/O Connector
Debug Port
TOP BOX
DACOM
LIGHT
TOWER
PLAYER
MARKETING MECHANICAL
METER
PCB
LINK
PROGRESSIVE SECURITY
DOOR CABINET SUBSIDIARY

EQUIPMENT
POWER SUPPLY
VIDEO
MONITOR
FLUORESCENT
BALLASTS
JACKPOT SWITCH POWER SUPPLY

SPEAKERS OPERATOR SWITCH INTERFACE BOARD UNIT
PUSH- HANDLE SWITCH MAIN BOARD
BUTTONS SOLENOID COMMUNICATIONS
LAMPS CONFIGURATION PCB
SECURITY SWITCHES
1 Main Door Mechanical
DOOR
1 Main Door Optical
SECURITY
7 Auxilliary Mechanical
7 Auxilliary Optical I/O DRIVER PCB
OPTIONAL PCB #1
COIN CHUTE
ASSEMBLY
SERIAL CHANNELS #1, #2, #3 HOPPER DEBUGGING

Network I/F, Touch Screen, PORT
Serial Printer, Bill Acceptor,
RS232, etc
I0077
Figure 11-2 System Architecture
11-6 Revision 01
11.3.1 Main Board Functions

The Main Board has the following capabilities and functions:
Core processor and memory.
- (ARM250 32 bits RISC ASIC operating at 12 MHz).
- On Board EPROMs.
- External Memory Board Interface.
- DRAM (a minimum of 1 Mbyte or 2 Mbyte as a build option).
Non-volatile storage.
- EEPROMs (2).
- SRAM for Electronic Meters (three devices).
LAB via the Interface Board.
Interrupt System.
- Interrupt glue logic.
- Timers and Operating System Tick logic.
Coin Handling System.
- Coin Chute.
- Hopper Interface.
Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI).
- SPI bus driver and multiplexer circuitry.
Internal Read/Write control registers.
Security.
- Security switches (up to 8 optical and 8 mechanical switches).
Communications.
- DES Encryption IC
- Four serial channels (two DUARTs). One channel is configured for FIP and
RS232; the other three are configurable for Bank Note Acceptor, Serial
Printer, Touch Screen, RS232, TTL, DACOM5000, or other signal levels.
- Mikohn Link Progressive pulse interface
Power Control System.
- Onboard DC-DC converter (+24 V to +5 V).
- Power supply supervisor and reset circuitry.
- Interface with the Solid State Relay (SSR).
- Status monitoring.
Reset System
Diagnostics.
- Circuitry for test, diagnostics and debugging (used in conjunction with the
External Memory board).
Real Time Clock (RTC).
Mechanical Switch Inputs.
- Five mechanical switch inputs for Cancel Credit/Reset, Audit, Handle, etc.
Video System.
Sound System.
Revision 01 11-7

This section begins with two diagrams: a block diagram (Figure 11-3) introducing
the various functional subsystems of the Main Board and a layout diagram (Figure
11-4) indicating the location of components on the Main Board. These diagrams
are followed by a description of the various components of the Main Board.
This section describes the various components of the main board.
Volume Audio
Video Reset
Control
Watchdog
8 bit I/O ARM 250
PROCESSOR Debug Port
Mikhon Link
Progressive
External I/O
32 bit
Interface
Memory (Optional)
Battery System
Backup Memory
Circuit Real Time
Clock Interrupt
Power Power Fail

Supply Unit
Timer
Mechanical SPI
Meters Interface FIP Display or
RS232
Mechanical (Channel 0)
Switches
UARTS
I/O Driver Parallel Serial Channel
Security Port #1, #2, #3
Board
Hopper Bank Note

Acceptor
I0121 Printer
(Optional)
Figure 11-3 Main Board block diagram
11-8 Revision 01
96-way Memory Expansion Connector External Battery P2 Link (EPROM size selection)
I0079
Revision 01
EPROM
Decoder
Power Supply
Regulator
I/O Buffers
Game EPROM sockets

Game EPROM sockets
Glue Logic
DRAM UART
Emulator Channel 2
DRAM DRAM and
ARM250 Encryption IC Channel 3
Microprocessor (410388 only)
410388 only UART

Channel 0
and
Back Up Back Up Back Up Channel 1
Battery Battery Battery
Figure 11-4 Typical Main Board layout (not detailed)

SRAM (3 off)
72 Pin SIMM Connector (P23)
Opto-isolators for Communications Board
Audio Amplifier
External I/O Buffers
11-9
Main Board
96 Way Connector (P21) 96 Way Connector (P22) 96 Way Connector (P20)

11.4.1 ARM250 Microprocessor

CPU
The ARM250 microprocessor communicates with on board peripherals via a high
speed 32 bit memory bus, an 8 bit I/O bus, and a serial (SPI) interface (see Figure
11-3). The ARM250 contains the following 5 major blocks within a single chip:
the ARM250 CPU
I/O controller (IOC)
video controller (VIDC)
memory controller (MEMC)
I/O expansion block (IOEB).
The ARM250 is a complete computer system on a chip comprising a 32-bit RISC

microprocessor, a memory controller with DRAM interface, a bit-mapped video
controller and an I/O controller. It is suitable for wide range of cost-sensitive
embedded control, portable and consumer game applications - particularly those
which require a video display.
The device is designed to drive up to 4 Mbytes of DRAM directly at 12 MHz, and
at this speed it can sustain approximately 10 MIPS.
I/O Data Bus

The ARM250 is designed to be easily interfaced to standard 8 bit peripheral chips.
The majority of the I/O is handled by the internal I/O controller, with some extra
functionality provided by the I/O expansion block. All I/O addresses in the
ARM250 are memory mapped.
The peripheral address bus is simply the latched address lines. These are buffered
to reduce loading and to avoid slowing down EPROM access.
Diagnostic LEDs
The ARM250 has 4 open collector I/O bits. These are connected to 4 easily
visible diagnostic LEDs to indicate diagnostic software status. The configuration
of the circuit ensures that when the CPU is in reset, or when the software does not
run, all the LEDs will be turned on. Therefore, faulty LEDs will be easily detected
and not interpreted as incorrect diagnostic code.
Interrupt System
The interrupt system of the ARM250 functions with two main interrupts, FIQ and
IRQ. Several external inputs are multiplexed internally to generate either a FIQ or
IRQ interrupt.
FIQ is defined as the "fast interrupt" and is used for real time processing. IRQ is
defined as the "slow interrupt" and is used for slower interrupts.
Specific registers are provided to enable the programmer to read the source of the
interrupt without reading all the devices.
FIQ is of higher priority than IRQ and can interrupt an IRQ service routine. IRQ
cannot interrupt FIQ. The priority of different interrupts is determined in software
after reading the status registers.
11-10 Revision 01
I/O Expansion Port Interrupts.

The I/O expansion port has 4 interrupts: IL0, IF, FL, and FH0 (schematic
IO_IN). Pull-up/down resistors pull unused interrupts to their inactive state. EMC
filtering is provided by 1 k resistors and 100 pF capacitors to prevent spurious
interrupts.
ARM250 Timers
The ARM250 has 4 built-in timers. These run off a 2 MHz clock and can time
intervals from 500 ns to 32.768 ms. Four primary clocks exist within the board:
72 MHz, 48 MHz, 25.175 MHz, and 32.768 kHz. All other clocks are derived
from these.
Primary Clock. The ARM250 uses a primary clock of 72 MHz which is
internally divided to provide 36 MHz for the memory controller, 36 MHz or
24 MHz for the video, 12 MHz for the CPU, 8 MHz and 2 MHz for the I/O
controller. The 72 MHz clock has a tight duty cycle specification of 45/55%.
System Clock. The CPU core (ARM2aS) and memory controller (MEMC) of
the ARM250 have an optional clock input to allow higher speed operation. A
48 MHz clock on the SYSCLK input of the ARM250 is divided by 3 giving
16 MHz CPU and memory operation.
Video Clock. The video clock may be either 36 MHz, 24 MHz or an optional
external crystal input. The external crystal is 25.175 MHz for VGA. The
clock selected for the video clock is output on the VIDCLK pin and input on
the CLKVID pin, which are normally connected together.
Time Clock. The real time clock chip uses a 32.768 kHz crystal to keep time.
The 8 MHz IOCLK output from the ARM250 is divided by 2 to 4 MHz for the
DES encryption chip, by 512 to 15625 Hz for the SPI, and by 4096 to
1953.125 Hz for the operating system timer interrupt. The 12 MHz ARM250
keyboard clock output CLKKB, and the 2 MHz CLK2 IOC are not used.
11.4.2 Sound
The ARM250 has a built in stereo audio interface, requiring only filtering and
amplification to drive a speaker. Sound data is accessed directly from DRAM and
output to the audio D/A converters. The board implements a single channel of
sound, because stereo is not required.
The Main Board provides monophonic audio with the following characteristics:
Bandwidth : 200 Hz to 5.5 kHz 10%.
Power output: 4 W RMS.
Frequency response shape: fourth order pole at 5.5 kHz 10%.
The volume is controllable via software with up to 16 steps.
The power amplifier features are:

Overload protected
Short circuit protected
Connected to the +24 V DC power supply.
Revision 01 11-11
A separate ground for the audio system has to be provided. It is connected to the
digital ground (+5 V ground) and the power ground (+ 24 V ground) at one point
only.
Volume Control
The volume is controlled by software according to the setting made in the
appropriate audit screen. The circuit uses a 4 bit control to give 16 levels. The
lowest level turns the sound off. The 74HC4066 switch is powered from +5 V
DC, and requires that the inputs are below +5 V DC at all times. The output of
the previous filter stage is decoupled with a 0.1 F capacitor and biased around
2.5 V DC.
Audio Power Amplifier

The TDA2006 audio power amplifier has overload/short circuit protection and is
powered from +24 V DC. The speaker output is filtered using a surface mount
ferrite bead and a 100 pF ceramic capacitor.
11.4.3 Video
The ARM250 has a built in video controller which directly drives a monitor. The
video system conforms to the IBM VGA standard (mode 2) and gives a resolution
of 640 x 400 pixels with 8 bits per pixel.
Each video output signal from the ARM250 is a current sink with respect to the
filtered video 5 V DC supply. The RGB signals (Red, Green and Blue) generate a
voltage across a sense resistor and a common super diode, formed by a PNP
transistor. The voltage across the sense circuit is converted to an output current
per colour by a PNP transistor emitter follower. The RGB monitor output
components are protected from transients by a three diode circuit for each colour
signal. A 220 load resistor limits the maximum unterminated voltage at each
transistor collector; this ensures the transistor does not saturate and disturb the
sense resistor signal. In normal use the RGB outputs generate an analogue 0.7 V
peak signal into an external 75 load. The sync signals have TTL levels.
11.4.4 Reset
The Main Board has 2 reset signals, RESETL and RESET. When reset is asserted
it has a nominal period of 200 ms (guaranteed 140-280 ms).
RESETL is the MAX705 reset output, valid for all supply voltages from 0-5 V
DC. It is used in the battery backed circuits to prevent glitches during power
up/down, while RESET is used every where else.
RESET is the normal active low reset, generated by buffering RESETL. It is
not valid between 0-2 V DC, as it is driven from HCMOS logic, which does
not operate under 2.0 V DC.
11-12 Revision 01
Watchdog Timer
The MAX705 incorporates a watchdog timer to reset the Main Board if the CPU
does not strobe the watchdog input periodically within the timeout interval with an
I/O access to RDCS1. The watchdog timeout period is nominally 1.6 seconds,
and is guaranteed to be in the range of 1.0 to 2.25 seconds. The manual reset
input (from the BTEST GAL) is asserted if the watchdog output trips (WDO) or if
the external reset input is asserted.
The MAX705 voltage comparator also checks the battery voltage.
All devices that can be reset are reset to give the board a well defined power up
state.
Direct write registers are reset to 0x00.
The ARM250 has 2 reset pins, RST and POR, and is reset through POR. RST
is a bidirectional pin driven from POR. When POR is asserted the CPU is reset
and RST is also asserted. RST is connected to the optional memory expansion
board, which is reset by the Main Board reset, but can also reset the CPU by
asserting RST.
Peripheral I/O devices are reset
I/O Expansion interface is reset
Battery test GAL outputs are disabled.
11.4.5 Debug (Keyboard) Port

The ARM250 has a built-in serial communications port, the KART (Keyboard
Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter). The KART is used only for debugging.
The data format is fixed at 8 data bits, 1 start bit, 2 stop bits and no parity. Unlike
a normal UART, the KART has no data buffering.
11.4.6 Debugging
DEMON
The ARM source level software debugger DEMON requires three modifications
to the Main Board to run.
1. The watchdog must be disabled
2. The DRAM emulator must be disabled, as DEMON modifies the interrupt
vectors in the first page of memory.
3. The interrupt from UART U71 channel 0 must be inverted and connected to
the CPU interrupt IL2. IL2 can generate either a IRQ or FIQ, but for
DEMON generates a FIQ.
The Main Board is fitted with switches to enable and disable the watchdog and
DRAM emulator, as although DEMON requires these features, normal game
software does not.
The memory expansion port contains a number of extra signals intended for
debugging purposes.
Revision 01 11-13
The CPU TEST signal implements the ARM250 tristate test mode when it is
asserted. The CPU reset signal can act as both a reset from the CPU and a reset to
the CPU.
The 72 MHz CPU clock oscillator supports the tristate enable/disable.
All nodes are accessible on the solder side of the board for ATE testing.
The ARM250 keyboard serial channel with signals KIN and KOUT is used for
a debug interface.
11.4.7 External I/O Expansion

Two expansion interfaces are provided:
I/O expansion through the interface board allows two general purpose 8-bit I/O
boards, and one security subsystem board to be added, using 96-way DIN41612
connectors.
The 32 bit memory expansion interface on the Main Board has a I/O port;
however, this interface is primarily designed to add extra EPROM to the
system.
I/O Boards
Twelve address lines are provided, to access 4 kbytes of I/O space on the I/O
boards. The 8 bit I/O data bus is buffered onto the I/O boards. I/O is accessed
using chip select DACK.
Peripheral PCBs take +5 V DC power from the Main Board. They may also
derive +5 V DC from the +24 V DC supply, independent of the Main Board;
however, care must be taken to avoid damage to both boards if the power supply
on either board fails.
Memory Expansion Board

The memory expansion interface has an I/O port. The I/O select line AEN
provides for 8-bit I/O expansion, which can be used to implement bank selection
page register, or any other interface.
11.4.8 Mikohn Link Progressive Interface (where fitted)

The Main Board provides an optically coupled, open-collector pulse interface to a
Mikohn Link Progressive system.
The output is the standard Mikohn interface:
Switches 20 mA at 24 V.
Optically isolated.
Reverse protection diode.
11-14 Revision 01
11.4.9 Memory
The Main Board has six types of memory:
DRAM provides memory for graphics, sound and other software requirements.
DRAM Emulator.
EPROM contains the game software.
SRAM provides memory for metering.
EEPROM contains high reliability configuration data.
The Real Time Clock also contains a number of bytes of SRAM.
DRAM
The Main Board has 2 Mbyte of dynamic RAM as standard. The ARM250 can
address a maximum of 4 Mbytes of DRAM, using its built in DRAM controller.
The ARM250 directly drives the multiplexed address lines (RA[9:0]), row and
column (RAS, CAS[3:0]) strobes, output (OE[1:0]), and write enable
(WE[1:0]) signals.
The Main Board must have at least 1 Mbyte of dynamic RAM fitted, with the
other 1 Mbyte being optional. Using 4 Mbit DRAMs the maximum possible (in 4
devices) is 2 Mbytes. The first bank of DRAMs is dual pitched to allow the use of
16 Mbit DRAMs allowing 4 Mbytes to be fitted in only 2 chips. As this is the
maximum addressable, the second bank would not be fitted.
DRAM Emulator
The DRAM emulator logic detects an access to the interrupt vector table and
substitutes either ROM or a fixed branch instruction (to EPROM) in place of the
DRAM.
EPROM
The data bus for EPROMs is 32 bit wide. The Main Board contains sockets for 8
EPROMs, which can be configured to 1, 2, or 4 Mbit chips and each is 16 bit
wide. This allows a maximum of 4 Mbytes of EPROMs, which is also the
ARM250 addressing limit.
To expand the memory beyond 4 Mbytes, the on-board EPROMs can be replaced
by an external memory PCB which sits onto the main board
Meters SRAM
The Main Board provides 32 kbytes of Static Random Access Memory (SRAM)
with battery back-up for the electronic meters.
The SRAM contains machine metering information, such as money in/out, game
history, etc. It is critical that this data is preserved reliably, and various
jurisdictions require multiple backups of the data.
Three standard low power SRAMs are fitted to the board. The data is usually
replicated three times, so that each chip contains identical data. Each memory is
checked against the other to verify that the stored data is correct.
Each chip is mapped to the same address, and the chip selected depends on the
bank select register. Access is mutually exclusive, increasing security with only
one chip visible in the CPU address space at a time. If the CPU crashes and
Revision 01 11-15
overwrites memory only one of the three devices can be corrupted. On reset, the
bank select register selects bank 0, which does not exist. The SRAMs are at banks
1,2,3.
EEPROMS
The Main Board has three serial EEPROMs. The minimum requirements are 128
bytes per EEPROM. The type selected is to be compatible with types providing
256 byte and 512 byte depth.
Table 11-1 Serial EEPROMs Characteristics

No. Socketed Write protected Comment
1 No Yes Surface mount package
2 Yes No For game options, DIP package
3 Yes No For network address, DIP package
Memory Expansion Port

The memory expansion port is primarily designed to add extra EPROM to the
Main Board. The memory expansion PCB allows for up to 4 Mbytes of EPROM
to be directly addressed together with signals to accommodate paged memory,
external DRAM emulation and debug facilities. When the signal REPLACE is
asserted from the expansion board it disables the on board EPROM, via address
decode GAL U22.
The external memory PCB interfaces with the Main Board via a 96-way
DIN41612 connector.
11.4.10 Real Time Clock

The Main Board uses a Dallas DS1202 Real Time Clock (RTC). It uses a
standard Dallas 3 wire interface, which is shared with the Dallas temperature
measuring chip. The real-time clock, meter RAM #0, and the battery-backed
security circuit on the I/O Driver Board are powered from the same battery.
11.4.11 Battery Backup Circuit

The Main Board has one lithium battery for the meter SRAM, Real Time Clock
and the security circuit on the I/O Driver Board (refer to the chapter I/O Driver
Board for details).
WARNING
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly
replaced. Replace only with the same or
equivalent type
CAUTION
Battery may explode if mistreated. Do not
recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire.
11-16 Revision 01
A resistor and diode combination in series prevents reverse charging of the

battery. A lithium battery can potentially explode if reverse charged.
The Main Board includes circuitry under CPU control to test the battery. The test
places a resistor load on the battery and checks the voltage after a short delay
(about 40 ms). The load is enabled from a monostable so that a fault in the
software will not discharge the battery.
The battery end life is at 2.0 V DC, below which the memory and logic are no
longer guaranteed to work. The test will indicate a battery fail at 2.5 V DC.
Replacing the Battery

When the battery is changed, power will be maintained for a limited time by the
decoupling capacitors. A connector is provided to allow for external battery
backup during battery replacement.
11.4.12 Power Control Interface

Signal inputs and outputs
The Main Board has several signal lines to interface with the power control
system as shown in the following table:
Table 11-2 Power Control System Signal Lines

Signal Type Comment
/SSR1 Output Control signal for the solid state relay to switch to low
power mode, open collector active LOW
/PFAIL Input Power Fail signal, open collector active LOW
/EPSU2OVR Input Output power 24 V correct, from power supply assembly
GND Power + 24 Volt ground from the PMS
Power Lines and Grounding Scheme

The Main Board receives +24 V DC from the power control assembly, via the
Interface Board.
The +24 V is supplied to the:
I/O Driver Board
Audio power amplifier.
Coin handling modules.
Bank Note Acceptor
Printer (if fitted)
Mechanical meters
Handle (if fitted)
The Main Board uses a Switched Mode Power Supply (SMPS) to generate
5 V DC and an isolated +/-12 V DC from the 24 V. The 5 V DC is used to supply
the logic circuits, as well as the I/O expansion boards and the optional security
subsystem board. The +/-12 V DC is supplied to the generic serial channels.
Revision 01 11-17
The 24 V DC input and the 5 V DC output are EMC filtered using ferrite beads
and ceramic capacitors.
The Main Board also receives 12 V DC from the I/O Driver Board. This supply is
passed through a linear regulator on the Main Board to generate the isolated
5 V DC supply required by the hopper.
The power supply has overcurrent protection for current > 6.5 A for +5.1 V. The
power supply is 'folded back' when overloaded. Power is resumed once the
overload is removed.
All outputs are protected from short circuit. The power is resumed after removal
of the short circuit. The power supply also shuts down if the junction temperature
of the regulator reaches 150C.
11.4.13 SPI Bus Driver and Multiplexer Circuitry

The Main Board implements a Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) bus for
communicating with the I/O Driver Board and other external peripheral devices.
The SPI bus is multiplexed into eight separate channels. Only one channel is
accessible at any given time.
Table 11-3 SPI Channel Signals

Name Type Description Comment
SCLK OUTPUT SPI Clock Serial bit clock. Common for all
the channels.
SIOEx OUTPUT SPI Channel x Enable line for the channel
Strobe It has to be one independent
line per channel
SPIRST OUTPUT SPI Clear Reset line to the channel.
Channel #7 has no reset.
Mechanical meters are reset
separate to all other channels
SPIRST2 OUTPUT SPI Channel 2 Reset mechanical meters
Clear
SPIDINx INPUT SPI Channel x It has to be one independent
Data Input line per channel
SPIDOUT OUTPUT SPI Data Common line for all the
Output channels
SPI Channels Functional Description

The board has seven SPI channels selected via three bits in an output register.
Channel 0 is defined as the reset or null state. Data written to channel 0 will be
read back in its bitwise inverted state as a diagnostic test.
The seven channels are allocated as follows:
11-18 Revision 01
Channel 1 Top box distribution board (Not Used)

Channel 2 Mechanical meters board
Channel 3 not used
Channel 4 Door inputs, via I/O Driver PCB
Channel 5 Door outputs, via I/O Driver PCB
Channel 6 Main board slow I/O
Channel 7 Main board security registers.
11.4.14 Printer and Mechanical Meters

The Main Board can also drive the following peripheral equipment:
Printer
Mechanical meters
11.4.15 Mechanical Switches

The board senses the status of five mechanical switches (signals MSWITCH0 to
MSWITCH4) in addition to the eight mechanical security switches. MSWITCH0
is the Audit reset switch, MSWITCH1 is the Jackpot reset switch, and
MSWITCH2, MSWITCH3, and MSWITCH4 are spare. The spare switches may
be used for an optional handle. The specifications for the inputs are:
The switch current is 5 mA from the 5 V logic supply.
The circuit is filtered for EMC. Input filtering provides EMC protection.
The signals are connected to the internal SPI channel via a low-pass filter and
sensed with HCMOS logic levels.
11.4.16 Security
The system caters for two types of security inputs, optical and mechanical, with 8
of each.
Optical Security
The Main Board provides the necessary circuitry to interface eight IR LED
emitter/photo-transistor detector pairs. The optical security sensors are monitored
by the Main Board when the machine is powered.
Sensor sharing between the Main Board and the optional security module is
accomplished by the use of diodes.
Table 11-4 Optical Security Sensor Assignment

Switch No. Function Switch No. Function
0 Main Door 4 Not used
1 Not used 5 Not used
Revision 01 11-19
Mechanical Security
The system provides the necessary circuitry to interface 8 mechanical security
switches. The mechanical security sensors are monitored by the Main Board when
the machine is powered. There is no monitoring of the mechanical security
system when the power is turned off.
The mechanical security sensor interface has the following specification:
Switch type: Single pole, changeover
Secure state: normally closed
Driving Source: +5 V DC
Table 11-5 Mechanical Security Switch Assignment

No. Function Monitored by...
0 Logic Cage Main Board only when machine is powered.
1 Top Box Not used.
2 Mechanical Meters Main Board only when machine is powered.
3 Cash Box Not used.
4 Main Door Main Board only when machine is powered.
5 Bank Note Stacker Main Board only when machine is powered.
6 Not used Spare.
7 Not used Spare.
11.4.17 Coin Handling System

Coin Chute Assembly
The Main Board interfaces with the coin chute assembly via the I/O Driver Board.
The Main Board receives the signals "NOD1A", "NOD1B", "NOD2A", "S7
ALARM", and "AUDIT" from the coin interface section of the I/O Driver Board.
It sends the control signals "NEODLEDON", "NECOINBLK", and
"NECOINDIV" to the I/O Driver Board, which converts these signals into the
form required by the coin chuting.
All inputs have EMC R/C filtering, with a cut-off frequency of 3.4 kHz.
Coin Diverter Solenoid

The coin diverter solenoid output circuit has the following specifications:
Switches 200 mA at 24 V
Open collector NPN (low side drive) output
Short circuit protected (up to +24 V)
Diode protected against back EMF
Table 11-6 Coin Handling Signals

Signal Name Function
+24v Coin diverter solenoid power
+5v Power for solenoid photo optic sensor
GND Ground
NOD1A Coin optic detector 1A, to Main Board
NOD1B Coin optic detector 2B, to Main Board
NOD2A Cash box optic detector, to Main Board
11-20 Revision 01
S7ALARM Simulated valid coin output to Main Board

AUDIT Audit pulse out for DACOM3000
/EODLEDON NOD LED enable from Main Board.
/ECOINBLK Coin block solenoid output from Main Board
/ECOINDIV Coin diverter signal from Main Board.
Refer to the chapters on the Coin Chute Assembly and the Driver Board for
further details.
11.4.18 Hopper Interface

The Main Board can interface with a hopper via the Interface Board. The hopper
is driven using a power driver.
The hopper receives 24 V to power the motor and an isolated 5 V to run the logic.
The isolated 5 V is derived from the 12 V supply using a linear regulator on the
Main Board. This voltage is also supplied, via the Interface Board, to other
peripheral boards requiring isolated 5 V.
The following table details the hopper interface signals.
Table 11-7 Hopper Control Signals

Signal Function I/O Note
Name
/EHOPCOIN Coin output detector I From hopper photo-optic detector
/EHOPON Hopper motor drive O +24 V driver output
/EHOPHI Hopper high probe I Detects hopper full
/EHOPLO Hopper low probe I Not used with ADH
P24V +24 V power for motor
/EHOPTEST Hopper sensor test O output from Main Board
/EHOPOVR Overcurrent sensor output I Not used with ADH
/EHOPDIR Hopper motor direction O Not used with ADH
control
HOP5V +5 V from Main Board O Converted from +12 V
GNDA Power and signal ground.
11.4.19 Serial Channels

The board has four serial channels, referred to as channels 0-3, which may be used
to communicate with peripheral equipment and external network interfaces. The
serial channels are implemented via two PC compatible DUART's. The serial
debug channel is implemented on the ARM250 and is described elsewhere.
Channel 0 has a non-isolated interface to a Fluorescent Interface Panel (FIP) and
an RS232 interface. Channels 1-3 are fully isolated and are configurable via the
Communications Configuration Board (CCB).
The serial ports are implemented using two industry standard UARTs. Each of
the three generic serial channels (channels 1 to 3) has 1 receive data, 1 transmit
data, 3 input and 3 output handshake lines.
The maximum baud rate supported is 9600 baud, except on channel 2 which uses
fast optocouplers.
Revision 01 11-21
Communications Configuration Board

Serial channels 1 to 3 are configured through the Communications Configuration
Board (CCB) plugged into the 72 pin SIMM socket on the Main Board. The CCB
converts the opto-coupled UART I/O to any of the following signal levels:
RS232
Current loop (Open collector)
Bank Note Acceptor interface
Serial printer
TTL compatible level
DACOM 5000
External network interface
Touchscreen
Other
Refer to the chapter Communications Configuration Board (CCB) for a detailed

description.
11.4.20 Bank Note Acceptor

The Main Board communicates with the Bank Note Acceptor via generic serial
channel 1 which is connected via P18 on the Interface Board.
11.4.21 Interface Board

The Main Board is connected to the Interface Board directly through three 96-way
male right-angle DIN41612 connectors as follows:
Optically Isolated Connector

All the I/O signals in this connector are optically coupled. It contains the UART
serial communication channels, SPI channels, Mikohn interface, hopper interface,
and control signals for the power supply. It also provides connection to the power
supply for +24 V, +5 V, +12 V DC, and 12 V.
Miscellaneous Connector
This connector contains the coin chute interface, video and audio signals, power
control system solid state relay, and the serial debug. It also connects to the +24 V
and +5 V power supply.
Security and I/O Expansion Connector

The connector contains both optical and mechanical security signals, mechanical
switch signals, and I/O expansion signals. It also provides connection to the
+24 V power supply.
11-22 Revision 01
WARNING
Turn the machine power OFF before
removing PCBAs from the logic cage.
CAUTION
When handling electrostatic sensitive
devices (ESDs) such as PCBAs, take care to
avoid physical contact with components. Do
not place ESDs on metal surfaces. PCBs
should be handled by their edges. Care
must be taken to avoid flexing the PCB, as
this may lead to physical damage.
Removal
To remove the Main Board:
1. Open the main door and switch OFF the machine.
2. Open the logic cage door.
3. Standard Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) prevention procedures should be
followed when handling PCBAs.
4. Lever the PCBA out of the runners using the board extractors, and withdraw
the board from the logic cage.
5. The PCBA should be placed in an antistatic bag immediately.
Note
A fault tag must be placed on any faulty
boards.
Replacement
Replacement is a reversal of the removal procedure. Both sides of the
replacement PCBA should be inspected for any signs of physical damage.
Revision 01 11-23
11.6Description of Connectors
11.6.1 Communications Configuration Board

A 72-pin SIMM socket is used to connect to the CCB:
Table 11-8 Communications Configuration Board connector - P23

Pin Pin Name Description
1 CFG2 DTR0 output signal through opto emitter
2 GNDI Ground
3 CFG4 RTS1 output signal through opto emitter
4 CFG1 DTR0 output signal through opto collector
5 SIN1 Input from channel 1 connector
6 CFG3 RTS1 output signal through opto collector
7 SOUT1 Output to channel 1 connector
9 CTS1 Input from channel 1 connector
11 DSR1 Input from channel 1 connector
12 CFG8 SOUT1 output signal through opto emitter
13 CFG7 SOUT1 output signal through opto collector
14 CFG10 CTS1 input signal through opto cathode
15 I1 Input from channel 1 connector
16 CFG11 DSR1 input signal through opto anode
17 CFG9 CTS1 input signal through opto anode
18 CFG12 DSR1 input signal through opto cathode
19 RTS1 Output to channel 1 connector
20 CFG13 SIN1 input signal through opto anode
21 DTR1 Output to channel 1 connector
22 CFG14 SIN1 input signal through opto cathode
23 O1 Output to channel 1 connector
24 P12VI +12v power
26 N12VI -12v power
28 GNDI Ground
31 CFG16 SOUT2 output signal through opto base
32 CFG15 Opto Vcc
11-24 Revision 01
Pin Pin Name Description

48 P12VI +12v power
50 GNDI Ground
52 N12VI -12v power
72 GNDI Ground
Revision 01 11-25
11.6.2 Optically Isolated Connector - P20

This connector interfaces with P1 on the Interface Board.
Table 11-9 Optically Isolated Connector - P20

PIN Pin Name Comment
A1 SIN1 Receive data, serial channel 1
B1 N12VI -12V from main board, isolated
C1 ---
A2 CTS1 Handshake Input 0, serial channel 1
B2 GNDI Ground of 12 voltage, isolated
C2 SOUT1 Transmit Data, serial channel 1
A3 I1 Handshake Input 2, serial channel 1
B3 P12VI +12V from main board, isolated
C3 DSR1 Handshake Input 1, serial channel 1
A4 O1 Handshake Output 2, serial channel 1
B4 DTR1 Handshake Output 1, serial channel 1
C4 RTS1 Handshake Output 0, serial channel 1
C5 ---
C6 SOUT2 Transmit data, serial channel 2
C9 ---
C10 SOUT3 Transmit data, serial channel 3
A13 ---
B13 ---
C13 ---
A14 ---
B14 ---
C14 ---
A15 ---
B15 ---
C15 ---
A16 ---
B16 ---
C16 ---
A17 /ESPIDIN2 Data from meter board
11-26 Revision 01

B17 GNDA Ground
C17 /ESPIDIN1 Data from top box
A18 /ESPIDIN5 Serial data input to main logic from serial input driver. Open
collector output.
B18 GNDA Ground
C18 /ESPIDIN4 Serial data input to main logic from serial output driver. Open
collector output.
A19 ESPIRST SPI reset signal
B19 GNDA Ground
C19 /ESPIDOUT Data output to meter board
A20 ESCLK Serial clock
B20 GNDA Ground
C20 ESPIRST2 Reset signal to meter board
A21 /ESIOE2 Strobe signal to meter board
B21 GNDA Ground
C21 /ESIOE1 Serial output enable to top box
A22 /ESIOE5 Serial output enable #5 which selects SPI output driver.
B22 GNDA Ground
C22 /ESIOE4 Serial output enable #4 which selects SPI input driver.
A23 /EHOPOVR Overcurrent sensor output, hopper
B23 GNDA Ground
C23 ---
A24 /EHOPHI Hopper high probe, Detects hopper full, hopper
B24 GNDA Ground
C24 /EHOPCOIN Coin output detector, hopper
A25 /EHOPDIR Hopper motor direction, hopper
B25 GNDA Ground
C25 /EHOPLO Detects hopper low, hopper
A26 /EHOPTEST Hopper Sensor Test output, hopper
B26 GNDA Ground
C26 /EHOPON Hopper motor drive, hopper
A27 ---
B27 GNDA Ground
C27 VCC +5V
A28 EPSU2SND ---
B28 GNDA Ground
C28 /EPSU2OVR ---
A29 /ESPARE01 Spare output signal
B29 GNDA Ground
C29 /EHANDLE ---
A30 P24VA +24V
B30 GNDA Ground
C30 P24VA +24V
A31 EMIKOHNP Mikohn signal
B31 P12V +12V from driver board
C31 P12V +12V from driver board
A32 ---
B32 GNDA Ground
C32 EMIKOHNN Mikohn signal
Revision 01 11-27
11.6.3 Miscellaneous Connector - P22

Table 11-10 Miscellaneous Connector - P22

A1 /ES2OVERDE Door detector on Mk4 (never used)
B1 GNDD Ground
C1 /EODLEDON NOD1 LED enable
A2 S7ALARM S7 Alarm or Coin Validator coin valid
B2 /ECOINDIV Coin Divert Drive (NPN trans. to GND)
C2 /ECOINBLK Coin Validator enable (switches power through NOD) / S7 Inhibit
A3 NOD1B NOD1 Coin output B / S7 Coin output 5
B3 GNDD Ground
C3 NOD1A NOD1 Coin out. A / S7 accumulator out.
A4 CVP0 S7 Coin output
B4 NOD2B NOD2 Coin output B
C4 NOD2A NOD2 Coin output A
A5 CVP2 S7 Coin output
B5 GNDD Ground
C5 CVP1 S7 Coin output
A6 /SSR1 solid state relay for ballast and monitor On/Off (LED cathode)
B6 CVP4 S7 Coin output
C6 CVP3 S7 Coin output
A7 RS232TX serial 0, nonisolated transmitter
B7 GNDD Ground
C7 FIPOUT Serial Transmit Data out
A8 RS232RX serial 0, nonisolated receiver
B8 RS232RTS nonisolated handshake Output 0, serial channel 0
C8 RS232CTS nonisolated handshake Input 0, serial channel 0
A9 ---
B9 RED Red, video
C9 REDGND red colour signal ground
A10 BLUE Blue, video
B10 GREENGND blue colour signal ground
C10 GREEN Green, video
A11 BLUEGND green colour signal ground
B11 VSYNC Vsync, video
C11 SYNCGND synchro signal ground
A12 SPEAKER Audio output
B12 ---
C12 HSYNC Hsync, video
A13 SPEAKER2 Stereo speaker output
B13 SPKRGND speaker signal ground
C13 P24VSND +24V, single track on PCB
A14 GNDD Ground
B14 VCC +5V from main board, converted from 24V
C14 GNDD Ground
A15 VCC +5V from main board, converted from 24V
B15 GNDD Ground
C15 VCC +5V from main board, converted from 24V
A16 GNDD Ground
C16 GNDD Ground
11-28 Revision 01

B17 GNDD Ground
A18 ---
B18 KOUT Serial data OUTPUT from ARM250
C18 KIN Serial data INPUT from ARM250
A19 ---
B19 GNDD Ground
C19 ---
A20 ---
B20 ---
C20 ---
A21 ---
B21 GNDD Ground
C21 ---
A22 ---
B22 ---
C22 ---
A23 ---
B23 GNDD Ground
C23 ---
A24 ---
B24 ---
C24 ---
A25 ---
B25 GNDD Ground
C25 ---
A26 VBATE External battery backup
B26 ---
C26 /PFAIL Power fail signal, active low
A27 /MIKOHN Emitter of link progressive for DACOM3000
B27 GNDD Ground
C27 ---
A28 ---
B28 ---
C28 ---
A29 ---
B29 GNDD Ground
C29 ---
A30 ---
B30 ---
C30 ---
A31 ---
B31 GNDD Ground
C31 ---
A32 ---
B32 ---
C32 ---
Revision 01 11-29
11.6.4 Security and I/O Expansion Connector - P21

Table 11-11 Security and I/O Expansion Connector - P21

A1 MSWITCH1 mech. switch, JACKPOT RESET
B1 GNDD Ground
C1 MSWITCH0 mech. switch, AUDIT RESET
A2 MSWITCH4 mech. switch, spare
B2 MSWITCH3 mech. switch, spare
C2 MSWITCH2 mech. switch, spare
A3 ---
B3 GNDD Ground
C3 ---
A4 MSS0 Logic Door Security Switch 7 contact - NC
B4 OPRIS0 Door security detector output, no driver/buffer exists.
C4 EMCS0 door optical emitter
A5 EMCS1 Emitter 1 Drive signal, security 1
B5 GNDD Ground
C5 MSSO0 Logic Door Security Switch 7 contact - NO
A6 MSSO1 Mechanical Security Switch 1 contact - NO
B6 MSS1 Mechanical Security Switch 1 contact - NC
C6 OPRIS1 Receiver 1 Sense signal, security 1
A7 OPRIS2 Receiver 2 Sense signal, security 2
B7 GNDD Ground
C7 EMCS2 Emitter 2 Drive signal, security 2
B8 MSSO2 Mechanical Security Switch 2 contact - NO
C8 MSS2 Mechanical Security Switch 2 contact - NC
A9 MSS3 Mechanical Security Switch 3 contact - NC
B9 GNDD Ground
A10 OPRIS4 Receiver 4 Sense signal, security 4
B10 EMCS4 Emitter 4 Drive signal, security 4
C10 MSSO3 Mechanical Security Switch 3 contact - NO
B11 GNDD Ground
C11 MSS4 Mechanical Security Switch 4 contact - NC
B12 MSS5 Mechanical Security Switch 5 contact - NC
B13 GNDD Ground
B14 OPRIS7 Receiver 7 Sense signal, security 7
C14 EMCS7 Emitter 7 Drive signal, security 7
A15 ---
B15 GNDD Ground
C15 ---
A16 VBAT0 Backup battery 0
B16 ---
C16 ---
A17 RNW CPU, read not write signal
11-30 Revision 01

B17 GNDD Ground
C17 ---
A18 /EIF CPU, IF interrupt
B18 EFHO CPU, FH0 interrupt
C18 /DACK CPU, data acknowledge
A19 /EFL CPU, FL interrupt
B19 GNDD Ground
C19 /EIL0 CPU, IL0 interrupt
A20 /ERESET CPU, external reset output
B20 /EIOW CPU, IO write signal
C20 /EIOR CPU, IO read signal
A21 EA13 CPU, address bus
B21 GNDD Ground
C21 ECLK8M CPU, clock signal
B22 EA11 CPU, address bus
C22 EA12 CPU, address bus
B23 GNDD Ground
B25 GNDD Ground
A26 ---
B26 ---
A27 ---
B27 GNDD Ground
C27 ---
A28 ED5 CPU, data bus
B28 ED6 CPU, data bus
C28 ED7 CPU, data bus
B29 GNDD Ground
A31 GNDD Ground
B31 P24VD +24V
C31 GNDD Ground
A32 P24VD +24V
B32 GNDD Ground
C32 P24VD +24V
Revision 01 11-31
Notes
11-32 Revision 01
NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual Interface Board
________Chapter 12________
Interface Board
Part No. 410315 Issue B
12.1 Physical Description ............................................................ 12-3
12.1.1 Diagrams and Component Locations ..................................... 12-3
12.2 Technical Description .......................................................... 12-5
12.3 Description of Connectors .................................................. 12-7
12.3.1 Main Board Connectors - P1, P2, and P3 .............................. 12-7

12.3.2 Driver Board, P4..................................................................... 12-7
12.3.3 LAB Comms, P5..................................................................... 12-7
12.3.4 Mechanical Meters, P6........................................................... 12-7
12.3.5 Security - P8, P22, and P24 ................................................... 12-7
12.3.6 Door Signals Interface - P10 and P11.................................... 12-9
12.3.7 Coin Handling, P12 .............................................................. 12-10
12.3.8 Bill Acceptor, Backlight and Security, P13 ........................... 12-11
12.3.9 Serial Channels - P14, P15, P17, and P18. ......................... 12-11
12.3.10 DACOM 5000, P21 .............................................................. 12-13
12.3.11 Mikohn, P16 ......................................................................... 12-13
12.3.12 SPI Channel 1, P19.............................................................. 12-14
12.3.13 DACOM 3000, P20 .............................................................. 12-14
12.3.14 Spare Voltage 24 V DC, P23................................................ 12-15
12.3.15 Hopper, P25 ......................................................................... 12-15
12.3.16 Video, P26............................................................................ 12-15
12.3.17 Mechanical Switches - P27 .................................................. 12-16
12.3.18 Audit / Jackpot switch and door security, P28 ...................... 12-16
12.3.19 Power Supply, P29............................................................... 12-17
12.3.20 Optional Fan DC 12 V, P30.................................................. 12-17
Revision 01 12-1
Interface Board NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual
12.4 Removal and Replacement Procedures ........................... 12-18
List of Figures
Figure 12-1 Interface Board Component Location ........................................................12-4
List of Tables
Table 12-1 Interface Board Connections.......................................................................12-6
12-2 Revision 01

The Interface Board is a single printed circuit board assembly (PCBA) mounted
vertically at the base of the cabinet, partly enclosed within the logic cage. The
Interface Board is used to electrically connect the Main Board, the I/O Driver
Board, and all peripheral PCBAs and subsystems.
The Main Board and I/O Driver Board connect directly to the Interface Board
within the logic cage. The Communication Configuration Board and the optional
I/O Expansion Board/LAB Communications Board connect directly to the Main
Board, within the logic cage. All other PCBAs and peripherals are connected to
the Interface Board via ribbon cables or wire looms.
The component layout of the Interface Board is shown in Figure 12-1.
12.1.1 Diagrams and Component Locations

the Interface Board is provided in Volume II:
Revision 01 12-3
I0093
Figure 12-1 Interface Board Component Location
12-4 Revision 01

The Interface Board provides electrical connection for the following boards and
connectors:
MkV Main Board
MkV Series II I/O Driver Board
MkV Series II Mechanical Meter Board
MkV Series II Power Supply Assembly
I/O Expansion Board / LAB Comms Board
Pushbuttons and Pushbutton Lamps
Coin Handling
Speakers
Video Monitor / Touchscreen
Networks
Security Switches
Jackpot / Audit Key Switches
Bill Acceptor
Mikohn Progressives
Hopper
Printer
Cooling Fan
Spare Power Connector
Spare Switch Connector
SPI Channel 1
Revision 01 12-5
The following table lists the function and type of each connector on the Interface
Board.
Table 12-1 Interface Board Connections

Designator Function Type of Connector
P1 MkV Main Board DIN 96 pin vertical female
P4 MkV Series II Driver Board DIN 96 pin vertical female
P5 Expansion I/O - LAB board DIN 96 pin vertical female
P6 Mechanical meter 26 way ribbon cable
P8 Logic door security 4 way Minifit
P10 Door buttons and lamps 1 24 way Minifit
P11 Door buttons and lamps 2 20 way Minifit
P12 Coin handling, speaker, and door opto 24 way Minifit
P13 Bill acceptor LEDs, backlight and security 14 way Minifit
P14 Serial channel no. 0 12 way Minifit
P15 Generic serial channel no. 2 16 way Minifit
P16 Mikohn 4 way Minifit
P17 Generic serial channel no. 3 16 way Minifit
P18 Serial channel no. 1 (bill acceptor) 20 way Minifit
P19 SPI channel 1 26 way ribbon cable
P20 DACOM 3000 20 way ribbon cable
P21 DACOM 5000 10 way ribbon cable
P22 Security no. 3-5 24 way Minifit
P23 Spare 24 V DC 4 way Minifit
P24 Security no. 6 & 7 14 way Minifit
P25 Hopper 14 way Minifit
P26 Video, touchscreen 16 way Minifit
P27 Mechanical switch - handle 12 way Minifit
P28 Audit/jackpot switch and door opto emitter 14 way Minifit
P29 MkV Series II power supply 16 way Minifit
P30 Fan 4 way Minifit
12-6 Revision 01
12.3 Description of Connectors

The following sections describe the connectors on the interface board. Some of
the connectors may not be applicable to all customers.
12.3.1 Main Board Connectors - P1, P2, and P3

P1, P2 and P3 interface with the 96-pin DIN connectors P20, P22 and P21
respectively, on the Main Board. Refer to the Main Board chapter for a listing of
pin assignments.
12.3.2 Driver Board, P4

The Driver Board connects directly to the Interface Board via a DIN 96 pin vertical
connector. Refer to the I/O Driver Boad chapter for a listing of the pin
assignments.
12.3.3 LAB Comms, P5

The LAB Communications Board connects to the Interface Board via a DIN 96 pin
vertical connector. Refer to the LAB Communications Board chapter for a listing
of the pin assignments.
12.3.4 Mechanical Meters, P6

This connector is located within the logic cage and facilitates the connection of the
electromechanical meters and also security switch 2. Refer to the
Electromechanical Meters chapter for a listing of the pin assignments.
12.3.5 Security - P8, P22, and P24

The security system monitors the optical and mechanical switch inputs during
normal operation.
The security signals are typically distributed as follows:
Security Mechanical Optical
0 Logic Cage Main Door
1 Top Box ----
2 Mechanical Meters ----
3 Cash Box ----
4 Main Door ----
5 Bill Acceptor Cover ----
6 ---- ----
7 ---- ----
Note: The actual distribution and use of security switches will depend on the
individual machine configuration.
Revision 01 12-7
Logic door security, P8

The function of the Logic Door security switch system is to detect access to the
logic system whilst power is off.
Pin Pin Name Comments
1 MSS0 Logic Door Security Switch 0 contact - NC
2 GND Ground
3 MSSO0 Logic Door Security Switch 0 contact - NO
4 ----
Security No.3 to No.5, P22

1 ----
3 GND Ground
5 ----
7 GND Ground
8 (Keyed)
9 MSSO3 Mechanical Security Switch 3 contact - NO
11 GND Ground
12 ----
13 ----
14 (Keyed)
16 GND Ground
18 GND Ground
20 GND Ground
23 GND Ground
24 ----
12-8 Revision 01
Security 6 and 7, P24

1
2 (Keyed)
4 GND Ground
7 GND Ground
8 ----
10 (Keyed)
11 GND Ground
14 GND Ground
12.3.6 Door Signals Interface - P10 and P11

Pushbuttons and lamps 1, P10
1 P22V5 +22.5 V for lamps
2 PBLMP1 Pushbutton lamp output 1
11 (Keyed)
13 P22V5 +22.5 V for lamps
14 (Keyed)
15 PBIN1 Pushbutton input 1
Revision 01 12-9
Pushbuttons and lamps 2, P11

1 P22V5 +22.5V for lamps
2 (Keyed)
10
18 (Keyed)
20
12.3.7 Coin Handling, P12

1 P24VA +24V
2 GNDA Ground
3 S7ALARM S7 error signal from S7 validator
4 CDIVPOS Coin diverter position from coin chute
5 CENABLE Coin validator enable signal
6 /CDIVERT Coin diverter solenoid output to coin chute
7 P12V +12V from driver board
8 CVP0 S7 Coin output
11 SPEAKER Audio output
12 SPEAKER2 Stereo speaker output
13 VCC +5V for NODs
14 GND Ground
15 CCREDIT Coin credit pulse
16 CSENSE Coin sense output from coin validator
17 CERROR Coin error signal from coin validator
18 ACCUMPRICE Accumulated coin output from S7 validator
19 GND Ground
22 OPRIS0 Door opto detector
23 SPKRGND1 Speaker ground 1
24 SPKRGND2 Speaker ground 2
12-10 Revision 01
12.3.8 Bill Acceptor, Backlight and Security, P13

2 (Keyed)
3 DNOMLED5 Bill acceptor denomination LED 1
6 BKLITE Bill acceptor denomination LED 4
9 DNOMLED4 Bill acceptor back light
11 (Keyed)
14 GND Ground
12.3.9 Serial Channels - P14, P15, P17, and P18.

Channel 0 has a non-isolated interface to a FIP (Fluorescent Indicator Panel)
display and an RS232 interface. Channels 1-3 are fully isolated and are
configurable via the Communications Configuration Board on the Main Board.
Serial channel 0, P14

1
2 (Keyed)
3 P12V +12V DC supply from driver board
4 RS232TX serial 0, nonisolated transmitter
5 RS232RX serial 0, nonisolated receiver
6 GND Ground
7
8 (Keyed)
9 RS232CTS nonisolated handshake Input 0, serial channel 0
10 RS232RTS nonisolated handshake Output 0, serial channel 0
12 FIPOUT Serial Transmit Data out
Revision 01 12-11
Generic serial channel 2, P15

1 P24V +24V
2 (Keyed)
3 SIN2 Receive data, serial channel 2
4 SOUT2 Transmit data, serial channel 2
5 CTS2 Handshake Input 0, serial channel 2
6 DSR2 Handshake Input 1, serial channel 2
7 (Keyed)
8 GND Ground
9
10 I2 Handshake Input 2, serial channel 2
11 P12VI +12V isolated, from main board
12 N12VI -12V isolated, from main board
13 GNDI Ground 12V isolated
14 RTS2 Handshake Output 0, serial channel 2
15 DTR2 Handshake Output 1, serial channel 2
16 O2 Handshake Output 2, serial channel 2
Generic serial channel 3, P17

1 P24V +24V
7 (Keyed)
8 GND Ground
9 ----
10 (Keyed)
13 GNDI Ground 12V isolated
12-12 Revision 01
Generic serial channel 1 (Bill Acceptor), P18

1 P24V +24V
3 SOUT1 Transmit Data, serial channel 1
8 GND Ground
9 GND Ground
10 not used
11 not used
12 (Keyed)
15 GNDI ground 12V isolated
17 (Keyed)
20 not used
12.3.10 DACOM 5000, P21

DACOM 5000/BIPS is a current loop connection with a source voltage of 24 V,
and it is connected via a 10-way ribbon cable IDC header. The DACOM
interface is configured on serial channel 3 through the Communications
Configuration Board.
9 Connected to pin 10 on interface board
10 Connected to pin 9 on interface board
12.3.11 Mikohn, P16

P16 is used for the Mikohn link progressive interface.
(Keyed)
1 EMIKOHNP collector of Opto
2 EMIKOHNN emitter of Opto
Revision 01 12-13
12.3.12 SPI Channel 1, P19

Pin Signal Function
1 ---
2 ---
3 ---
4 ---
5 ---
7 ---
9 ---
10 ---
11 ESCLK Serial clock
13 /ESPIDOUT Data output to meter board
15 /ESIOE1 Serial output enable to top box
16 ---
17 ESPIRST Reset signal to top box
19 /ESPIDIN1 Data from top box
21 P24VA +24V
23 P24V +24V
25 P24VA +24V
26 P24VA +24V
12.3.13 DACOM 3000, P20

The purpose of this connector is keep compatibility with previous gaming
machines. It merges certain signals defining the state of the machine and can be
connected to the DACOM 3000 Interface Board.
1 MSS4 Mechanical Security Switch 4 contact - NC, door switch
3 NESPARE01 Spare output signal
5 /EHOPON Hopper motor drive, hopper
6 /MIKOHN emitter of link progressive for DACOM3000
7 /PFAIL power fail signal of 24V
8 NOD1A NOD1 Coin out. A / S7 accumulator out., coin input
9 /EHOPCOIN Coin output detector, hopper
10 AUDIT Signal from driver board
11 GND Ground
12 ----
13 GND Ground
14 ----
15 GND Ground
16 MSWITCH0 mech. switch, AUDIT RESET
18 MSWITCH1 mech. switch, JACKPOT RESET
19 P24V +24V
12-14 Revision 01
12.3.14 Spare Voltage 24 V DC, P23

Provides a spare 24 V DC output.
1 P24V +24V
2 P24V +24V
3 GND Ground
4 GND Ground
12.3.15 Hopper, P25

The hopper interface has the following pin assignment:
1 P24VA +24V
2 /EHOPCOIN Coin output detector, hopper
3 /EHOPON Hopper motor drive, hopper
4 (Keyed)
5 /EHOPHI Hopper high probe, Detects hopper full, hopper
6 /EHOPLO Detects hopper low, hopper
7 GNDA Ground
8 HOP5V +5V from main board, converted from 12V
9 (Keyed)
10 /EHOPDIR Hopper motor direction, hopper
11 /EHOPOVR Overcurrent sensor output, hopper
11 /EHOPTEST Hopper Sensor Test output, hopper
13
14 GNDA Ground
12.3.16 Video, P26

The video connector enables the connection of a VGA standard monitor.
1
2 HSYNC Hsync, video
3 BLUE Blue, video
4 GREEN Green, video
5 RED Red, video
6 GNDE Chassis ground
7 RS232RX Serial 0, nonisolated receiver
8 RS232TX Serial 0, nonisolated transmitter
9 SYNCGND GND, video
10 (Keyed)
11 VSYNC Vsync, video
12 (Keyed)
13 BLUEGND Blue return, video
14 GREENGND Green return, video
15 REDGND Red return, video
16 GND Ground
Revision 01 12-15
12.3.17 Mechanical Switches - P27

Five mechanical switches are available in addition to the eight mechanical security
switches. P27 provides for three spare switches that may be used for an optional
handle.
1 P24V +24V
2 /EHANDLE Handle
3 (Keyed)
4 ----
5 MSWITCH4 Mech. switch, spare
6 GND Ground
7
8 (Keyed)
10 GND Ground
12 GND Ground
12.3.18 Audit / Jackpot switch and door security, P28

P28 provides for the Jackpot reset switch and the Audit switch, as well as the
main door optical emitter, the main door mechanical security switch, and a spare
24 V output.
1 P24V +24V
2 (Keyed)
3 MSS4 Door security
4 (Keyed)
5 GND Ground
6 EMCS0 door optical emitter
7 GND Ground
8 P24V +24V
9 GND Ground
10 GND Ground
11 MSWITCH1 Audit reset
12 GND Ground
13 MSWITCH0 Jackpot reset
14 GND Ground
12-16 Revision 01
12.3.19 Power Supply, P29

1 /SSR1 Low power mode
2 (Keyed)
3 /EPSU2OVR Output 24V correct
4 P24VS +24V
5 P24VS +24V
6 P24VS +24V
7 P24VS +24V
8 P24VS +24V
9 Future expansion
10 /PFAIL Missing mains detection
11 GNDS Ground
12 GNDS Ground
13 GNDS Ground
14 GNDS Ground
15 (Keyed)
16 GNDS Ground
12.3.20 Optional Fan DC 12 V, P30

This connector is used to power an optional fan that may be mounted to the logic
cage. The purpose of this fan is to relieve possible heat dissipation problems
within the logic cage.
Pin Signal Function
1
2 P12V +12V DC supply from Driver Board
3 (Keyed)
4 GNDA Ground
Revision 01 12-17

CAUTION
avoid physical contact with components.
PCBAs should be handled by their edges.
ESDs should not be placed on metal
surfaces. When handling PCBAs, take care
to avoid flexing the PCBA, as this may lead
to permanent damage.
Removal
The procedures for removing and replacing the Interface Board are detailed in the
chapter Cabinet, under the section describing how to remove and disassemble the
logic cage.
Note
A fault tag must be placed on any faulty
equipment.
Run a complete machine test after replacing the Interface Board.
12-18 Revision 01
NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual I/O Driver Board
______Chapter 13______
I/O Driver Board -
410415
13.1.1 Circuit Diagrams and Component Locations............................ 13-3
13.2.1 Power Supply ........................................................................... 13-6

13.2.2 Pushbuttons and Lamps .......................................................... 13-6
13.2.3 Coin Handling Interface............................................................ 13-7
13.3 Removal and Replacement Procedures ............................. 13-10
13.4 Connector Pin Assignment ................................................. 13-11
Revision 01 13-1
I/O Driver Board NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual
List of Figures
Figure 13-1 I/O Driver Board - Location ........................................................................13-3
Figure 13-2 I/O Driver Board - Block Diagram ..............................................................13-4
Figure 13-3 I/O Driver Board 410415 - Component Layout...........................................13-5
Figure 13-4 Coin Handling Interface Signals .................................................................13-7
Figure 13-5 Timing of Coin Handling Output Signals ....................................................13-8
List of Tables
Table 13-1 Coin Handling Signals - Explanation ...........................................................13-8
Table 13-2 LED Functions.............................................................................................13-9
13-2 Revision 01

The MVP gaming machine is fitted with the MkV Series II I/O Driver Board II
Part No. 2501-410415.
The I/O Driver Board is located inside the logic cage where it connects directly to
the Interface Board (see Figure 13-1). Nylon slots are provided on the inside of
the logic cage to guide the I/O Driver Board into position.
Logic Cage
Main Board
I/O Driver Board
I0094
(if fitted)
Interface Board
Figure 13-1 I/O Driver Board - Location
13.1.1 Circuit Diagrams and Component Locations

the I/O Driver Board is provided in Volume II:

The I/O Driver Board provides an interface between some of the machine
equipment and the Main Board via the Interface Board (see Figure 13-2). The SPI
Bus on the Main Board is connected to the I/O Driver Board, allowing the Main
Board to address all I/O attached to the I/O Driver Board. The following machine
equipment is connected to the I/O Driver Board.
Revision 01 13-3
Lamps
Pushbuttons
Bill Acceptor LEDs
Coin Management Devices
+24 V +22.5 V
12 V
+5 V +12 V
Regulator
GND
I0124
Figure 13-2 I/O Driver Board - Block Diagram
13-4 Revision 01
MKV SERIES 2 DRIVER 2
U1 L5
PCBA 2501-410415 ISSUE A01
C20 0801-410414 REV 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
C50
Revision 01
C6 C72
U10 U15
L1
C55 R131 R139 R157
C51 R127 R130
R140 R158
D1 D2
+ C48 + C52
R141 C65
D9 R85
R106 R142 R159
J1
C32 C56 R160 R163
A B C D C31 R69
D6 D10 D13 D16 D19 D22 C63
32 C7 C12 R30 C26 R115 JP1
Y1 C66 R164
C1
30 R146 LED1
R2
R3
D7 D11 D14 D17 U8 R165
R11 R21 R31 R41 C67
VR01 R108 R120 R126 LED2
R10 R20 C21 R54
1A
VR02 R4 R12 R22 R40 C62
VR03 R32 D3 D4 D5 D8 D12 D15 D18

R121
1B
VR05 R133 R143

C22 R109
VR04 C53 LED3
C2 C8 C13 R42 R56 R134
VR07 C3 C9 C14 C23 C27 C33 C40 R84 R122
U2 R86 R103 U9 R123 R153
NOD: 2B
U13 U14
20 D24
R72 R135
R5 R13 R23 R33 R73
VR08
R43 R87 C49
VR09 R26 R44 R74
VR10
VR06 R25 R35 R46 R58 R57 R125
VR12 R24 R34 R45 R59 C41 R124
VR14 C45 C54 C57 C64
R75
VR13 U11 U16
R15 R76 R99 R110 R116 R144
R147
R16 U3 U6
R77 R88
C10
R14 C39 C61 R166
10
C15 C24 C28 C34 R60 R89 C60
R36 R47 R61 R148 C70
L2 C16 C35 R62
C71
C29 C37
L3 C17 C46
R48 R78 C42 R149 R167
L4 C18 R49 R79 R168

R96 R150
VR11
R50 R80 R117 R129 R169
VR15 R90 R100 R111 Q2 R145
R64 R63
VR16 U4 R97
1 R18 R28 R38 R52 R66 R101 R112 R118 U12 R151 R155 U17
R19 R17 R27 R37 R51 R65 R81 Q1 U7 C58 C68
A B C D R170
R6
R91
Figure 13-3 I/O Driver Board 410415 - Component Layout

R7 R82
R8 R83 R92
C4 C38 C43 C47
R9 C11 C19 C25 C30 C36

R29 R39 R53 R67
C5 R94 R98
R171
C59
C69
LEISURE INDUSTRIES R102 R113 R119 R138 R152 R156
1996
R128
R162
DRIVLAY1.CDR
I/O Driver Board
13-5
13.2.1 Power Supply

The I/O Driver Board receives 24 V DC from the power supply assembly and
5 V DC from the Main Board. The 24 V DC is reduced to 22.5 V DC by voltage
dropping diodes and supplied to the pushbutton lamps and switches.
A switched-mode regulator on the I/O Driver Board is used to generate 12 V DC
from the 24 V DC supply. This voltage is supplied to the coin handling system,
the Main Board, and the optional fan.
13.2.2 Pushbuttons and Lamps

The I/O Driver Board drives the pushbutton lamps and receives the inputs from
the player pushbutton switches.
Sixteen pushbutton lamp outputs are available. The lamps are rated at 24 V DC
and 2 W. The lamp outputs are latched into two latches. During the power-up
phase, the latches are reset to ensure all lamps are off. The lamps are driven by
drivers with short-circuit protected outputs. The I/O Driver Board sinks the lamp
current to drive the lamps. Each driver can sink a maximum of 700 mA at
24 V DC. The lamps are supplied with 22.5 V rather than 24 V to increase their
lifetime.
All lamp outputs include warm-up resistors (2.4 k, 0.6 W) to protect the lamp
drivers against high current peaks when the lamps are turned on.
Similarly, sixteen pushbutton switch inputs are provided. The 24 V DC
pushbutton switch signals are converted to TTL levels by voltage dividers and
then input to latches. These inputs are filtered to reduce bouncing of the signal
caused when players strike a pushbutton.
Animation lamps and light tower lamps, if fitted, are driven in the same manner.
The I/O Driver Board also provides outputs for seven bill acceptor LEDs and one
bill acceptor backlight.
EMI Protection
Transient Voltage Suppressors (TVSs) are included on all sixteen pushbutton
lamp outputs to protect against electromagnetic interference (EMI).
The board also has a 100 nF capacitor used with the NERESET signal. This
component also protects against EMI.
13-6 Revision 01
13.2.3 Coin Handling Interface

A switch mode regulator on the I/O Driver Board generates 12 V DC 5% from
the +24 V supply to power the coin handling system.
The coin handling system interfaces with the I/O Driver Board via the 24-pin
connector P12 on the Interface Board. This connector also distributes the signals
to the speakers and the door optical security sensor.
The coin handling interface section of the I/O Driver Board generates the signals
NOD1A, NOD1B, "NOD2A", "S7 ALARM", and "AUDIT" and transfers
these to the Main Board. It receives the signals NEODLEDON,
NECOINBLK and NECOINDIV from the Main Board and converts these into
the form required by the coin handling system.
The coin handling system used in the Mk4/5XR machines is the Condor CN133A
Validator, with separate diverter and diverter position detector.
The signals to and from the coin handling assembly are shown in Figure 13-4 and
explained in Table 13-1. Timing diagrams for the output signals to the Main
Board are shown in Figure 13-5.
Jumper Link
LED 1-3
JP1
Main Board I/O Driver Board Coin Handling

I0096 Assembly
Figure 13-4 Coin Handling Interface Signals
Revision 01 13-7
Table 13-1 Coin Handling Signals - Explanation

Signal Name Explanation
CSENSE Coin Sense Signal from CC-62/CC-46/Condor (Active Low)
CCREDIT Credit Signal Output from CC-62/CC-46/Condor (Active Low)
CERROR Error Signal Output from CC-62/CC-46/Condor (Active Low)
ACCUMPRICE Accumulated Price output from S7 Validator (Active Low)
S7ERROR Error Signal Output from S7 Validator (Active High)
CDIVPOS Coin Diverter Position Detect from Optics
NODLEDON Test Optics Signal from Main Board
NCOINBLK Disable/Enable Coin Validator from Main Board
NOD1A Upper Coin Optic to Main Board
NOD1B Lower Coin Optic to Main Board
NOD2B Cashbox Optic to Main Board
S7ALARM Simulated Valid Coin Pulse to Main Board
AUDIT Audit Signal input to Main Board
CENABLE Enable/Disable Output to Coin Validator from Driver Board
25ms 25ms
NOD1A NOD1A
NOD1B NOD1B
NOD2B NOD2B
S7ALARM S7ALARM
AUDIT AUDIT
Valid Coin 500ms Yo-Yo
NOD1A
NOD1B
NOD2B
S7ALARM
AUDIT
I0097
Coin Fault
Figure 13-5 Timing of Coin Handling Output Signals
Jumper Link (JP1)

To configure the logic properly, the jumper link JP1 should present for the Condor
coin validator.
13-8 Revision 01
Diagnostic LEDs
Three LEDs are located on the front of the board to indicate the status of certain
conditions (see the table below).
Table 13-2 LED Functions
Condition Red-LED1 Red-LED2 Green-LED
No Activity Off Off Off
Valid Coin to Hopper Pulse Pulse Off
Valid Coin to Cashbox Pulse Pulse Pulse
Error (or Yo-Yo) Continuous Continuous Off
Fault Continuous Continuous Continuous
Revision 01 13-9
CAUTION
avoid physical contact with components.
PCBAs should be handled by their edges.
ESD items should not be placed on metal
surfaces.
CAUTION
When handling PCBAs, take care to avoid
flexing the PCBA. Flexing may cause
physical damage.
Removal
To remove the I/O Driver Board
followed when removing PCBAs.
4. Release the I/O Driver Board from its connected position using the extractor
handles. Withdraw the board from the logic cage.
5. Place the I/O Driver Board on an antistatic bag immediately.
Note
A Fault Tag must be placed on a faulty
board.
Replacement
The replacement procedure is the reverse of the removal procedure.
13-10 Revision 01
13.4 Connector Pin Assignment

A 96-way DIN41612 connector provides all inputs and outputs to the Interface
Board.
Pin Signal Function

A1 GNDA Signal/power ground
B1 GNDA Signal/power ground
C1 AUDIT Connected to DACOM 3000
A2 PBIN1 Push Button Input 1
B2 /ESPIDOUT SPI Data Out from Main Board
C2 /ESIOE4 SPI Channel 4 (Door output) Enable
B3 PBIN3 Push Button Input 3
C3 /ESIOE5 SPI Channel 5 (Door output) Enable
C4 ESCLK SPI Clock
C5 /ESPIDIN4 SPI Cannel 4 Data In to Main board
C6 /SPIDIN5 SPI Cannel 4 Data In to Main board
B7 PBLMP1 Push Button Lamp Output 1
C7 ESPIRST SPI Reset from Main board
A8 GNDA Signal/power ground
C8 GNDA Signal/power ground
A9 PBLMP2 Push Button Lamp Output 2
C9 PBLMP4 Push Button Lamp Output 4
A10 P22V5 +22.5 volts for lamp
B10 P22V5 +22.5 volts for lamp
C10 P22V5 +22.5 volts for lamp
A11 P22V5 +22.5 volts for lamp
B11 VCC +5 volts from Main board
C11 VCC +5 volts from Main board
B12 P12V +12 volts for main board and coin validator
C12 P12V +12 volts for main board and coin validator
C13 PBLMP8 Push Button Lamp Output 8
C15 MSSO0 Mechanical security switch 0 normally open
C16 MSS0 Mechanical security switch 0 normally closed
Revision 01 13-11

A20 S7ALARM S7 signal to the main board
B22 CCREDIT Coin credit pulse
A23 CSENSE Coin Sense output from coin validator
B23 CERROR Coin Error signal from coin validator
A24 ACCUMPRICE Accumulated coin output from S7 validator
B24 S7ERROR S7 error signal from S7 validator - also connected to S7ALARM
of main board
C24 /ECOINDIV Coin diverter signal from main board
A25 CDIVPOS Coin diverter position from coin chute
B25 CENABLE Coin validator enable signal
C25 /ECOINBLK Coin block solenoid output from main board
A26 /ERESET Reset
A27 /CDIVERT Coin diverter solenoid output to coin chute
B27 DNOMLED1 Bill Acceptor Denomination LED 1
C27 /EODLEDON NOD LED enable form main board
A28 DNOMLED2 Bill Acceptor Denomination LED 2
C28 VBAT0 Battery 0 output from main board
C29 NOD2A Cash box Optic Detector 2A
C30 NOD1B Coin Optic Detector 1B
A31 BKLITE BACC Back Light output
B31 NOD1A Coin Optic Detector 1A
C31 P24VA +24 V power
A32 P24VA +24 V power
B32 P24VA +24 V power
C32 P24VA +24 V power
13-12 Revision 01
NSW MK4/5 Video Service Manual Communications Configuration Board
________Chapter 14________
Communications Configuration Board -
410217
14.4 Connector Pin Assignments ................................................. 14-7
14.5 General Maintenance ............................................................. 14-7
Revision 01 14-1
Communications Configuration Board NSW MK4/5 Video Service Manual
List of Figures
Figure 14-1 Communications Configuration Board - Location ......................................14-3
Figure 14-2 Communications Configuration Board - Block Diagram ............................14-4
14-2 Revision 01

The Communications Configuration Board (CCB) is located within the logic cage
where it connects to the Main Board via a 72-pin SIMM socket (see Figure 14-1).
The CCB is used to configure the internal serial communications ports 1, 2 and 3
for various signal levels.
Each channel connects to a 16-way Minifit connector on the Interface Board.
Channel 3 also connects to a 10-way ribbon cable connector for the DACOM.
Communications
Configuration Board
Logic Cage
72-Pin SIMM
Socket
Main Board
I0090
Interface Board
Figure 14-1 Communications Configuration Board - Location
the Communications Configuration Board is provided in Volume II:
Revision 01 14-3

The Main Board has four serial channels - 0, 1, 2 and 3. Channel 0 is reserved for
communications with a Touchscreen interface or a Serial Keno Panel interface.
Channels 1, 2 and 3 are fully isolated and can be configured using the
Communications Configuration Board.
The CCB plugs into the Main Board via a standard 72-pin SIMM socket and
converts the opto-coupled UART serial and I/O signals into the desired signal
levels. There are several different CCBs used to configure the communications
channels for different signals to suit different markets. The table below shows the
configuration for PCBA 410217.
Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3
Bank Note Acceptor RS232
The connectors on the Interface Board used for the serial channels are as follows:
Channel 0 Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3
P14 P18 P15 P17
The serial channels are supplied with isolated 12 V at 100 mA from the Main
Board, as well as +5 V to run the logic circuits.
FIP Display
Serial Channel 0
DACOM/BIPS
Opto-Isolators
Serial Channel 1 Devices:

Bank Note Acceptor
Communications
Serial Channel 2 IGT Interface
Configuration
RS 232
Board
Serial Channel 3
RS 485
DACOM 5000
Touch Screen
Other...
+12 V
-12 V
I0091
Figure 14-2 Communications Configuration Board - Block Diagram
14-4 Revision 01
Bank Note Acceptor Interface

The bank note acceptor interface provides TTL/CMOS communication (serial
input only from bank note acceptor) with handshaking.
The data transfer rate is 600 baud, 8 bit data, 1 start bit, 1 stop bit and no parity.
This port uses the 16-way Minifit connector P18 on the Interface Board.
The serial protocol is 'one way' in that the bank note acceptor sends to the host an
ASCII code, depending on the type of note inserted or the status of the bank note
acceptor. The host enables, disables or accepts the note via two control lines -
ACCEPT ENABLE and SEND.
RS232 Interface
This interface provides RS232 communications between the Main Board and an
external interface board. The channel has six I/O signals, including data I/O. The
opto LED drivers on the Main Board are configured to an OFF state when the line
is inactive or not connected to minimise power consumption. This port can be run
at a minimum 9600 baud rate.
Revision 01 14-5
CAUTION
When handling electrostatic devices (ESDs)
such as PCBAs, take care to avoid physical
contact with components. Handle PCBAs by
their edges. Do not place ESD items on
metal surfaces. When handling PCBAs, take
care to avoid flexing the PCBA. Flexing may
cause physical damage.
To remove the Communications Configuration Board (see Figure 14-1):

followed when removing PCBAs.
4. Release the Main Board using the extractor pins, and withdraw it from the
logic cage.
5. Locate the Communications Configuration Board sitting perpendicular to
the Main Board in the top left.
6. Release both of the two metal spring retainers located on each side of the
PCBA.
7. Remove the board by lifting it upwards while holding the Main Board
steady.
Note
A fault tag must be placed on a faulty PCBA.
To replace the Communications Configuration Board:

followed when replacing PCBAs.
2. Remove the replacement board from the antistatic bag.
3. Inspect both sides of the board for any signs of physical damage.
4. Press the Communications Configuration Board into position on the Main
Board.
5. Slide the Main Board into the correct logic cage grooves and gently move
the board into position on the Interface Board. Close the logic cage door.
6. Switch the machine on, and close the cabinet door.
Note
Run relevant machine tests after replacing
the Communications Configuration Board.
14-6 Revision 01
14.4 Connector Pin Assignments

For a listing of the 72 pin connector assignment to the Main Board, refer to the
Main Board chapter. The pin assignments for the serial channel connectors P14,
P15, P17, and P18 are listed in the relevant sections of the Interface Board
chapter.
CAUTION
For general maintenance of the Communications Configuration Board:

Make sure that all contacts on the PCBA and in the SIMM socket on the
Main Board are clean.
Check that the connectors are in good condition and secure.
Revision 01 14-7
Notes
14-8 Revision 01
NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual LAB Communications Board
______Chapter 15______
LAB Communications Board -
410174
Note:
Chapter includes LAB Communications PSU Fusing and Serial
Interface Card Mounting Chassis (PSU Chassis)
15.1 Technical Description ............................................................ 15-3
15.1.1 Physical Description ................................................................. 15-3

15.1.2 Basic Operation........................................................................ 15-6
15.1.3 LAB PSU Chassis Description ................................................. 15-7
15.2 Removal and Replacement.................................................. 15-10
15.2.1 Removal ................................................................................. 15-10

15.2.2 Replacement .......................................................................... 15-10
15.3 Connector Pin Assignments ............................................... 15-11
15.3.1 Interface Board Slot P6 .......................................................... 15-11
15.4 General Maintenance ........................................................... 15-13
Revision 01 15-1
LAB Communications Board NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual
List of Figures
Figure 15-1 LAB Communications Board - position in logic cage ...................................... 15-3
Figure 15-2 LAB Communications Board - Component Layout ......................................... 15-5
Figure 15-3 LAB Communications Board - Block Diagram ................................................ 15-6
Figure 15-4 LAB PSU Chassis ........................................................................................... 15-8
Figure 15-5 PSU Chassis - PSU Fuse and Connector Wiring ........................................... 15-8
Figure 15-6 LAB Communications Board and PSU Kit ...................................................... 15-9
List of Tables
Table 15-1 LAB Port 1 Pinout............................................................................................. 15-4
Table 15-2 LAB Ports 2-6 Pinout........................................................................................ 15-4
Table 15-3 Interface Board Bus Connector for LAB Communications Board .................. 15-11
15-2 Revision 01

The LAB communications board is mounted inside the logic cage below the main
board and is perpendicularly mounted to the interface board via a 96 way right
angled DIN41612 connector (see Figure 15-1). It consists of one bi-directional and
five uni-directional RS422 serial ports which communicate with various types of
subsidiary equipment.
Logic Cage
Main Board
I/O Driver Board
I0076
(if fitted)
Interface Board
Figure 15-1 LAB Communications Board - position in logic cage
The LAB communications board is designed to comply with the relevant LAB
requirements, namely:
Provision for 6 ports P1 to P6, with P1 being bi-directional whilst ports P2 -
P6 are uni-directional.
Each port operating in conformance to the RS 422 standard as described in
the LAB guidelines with the addition of pull up/down resistors at the RS422
receiver inputs of particular signal lines.
Transmission from each port being asynchronous at 9600 bps.
A power good status output signal provided at each port.
A subsidiary equipment function (SEF) status input signal received at
each port from an external source.
All unused ports capped with power good status output signals fed back
through the SEF status input line.
Revision 01 15-3
The port 1 connector is a 10 pin Amphenol 816 (short) series type with the pinouts
as shown in the following table.
Table 15-1 LAB Port 1 Pinout

Pin Signal Name Signal Function Signal Direction
1 Common Signal GND
2, 3 Tx Data Transmit Data From LAB Comms Board
4, 5 Rx Data Receive Data To LAB Comms Board
6, 7 Power Good EGM Power is Normal From LAB Comms Board
8, 9 SEF Subsidiary Equipment To LAB Comms Board
Functioning Normally
Status
The connectors for ports 2-6 are 10 pin Amphenol 816 (short) series type with the
pinouts as shown in the following table.
Table 15-2 LAB Ports 2-6 Pinout

Pin Signal Name Signal Function Signal Direction
1 Common Signal GND _
2, 3 Tx Data Transmit Data From LAB Comms Board
6, 7 Power Good EGM Logic Power is From LAB Comms Board
normal
8, 9 SEF Subsidiary Equipment To LAB Comms Board
Functioning Normally
Status
Circuit Diagrams and Component Locations

the LAB Communications Board is provided in Volume II:
Circuit diagrams.
Figure 15-2 shows the component layout of the LAB Board.
15-4 Revision 01
C1
Revision 01
C33 R38
C32 R37
C31 R34
C29 U8 C30 R33
R79
C2 R76 C81 R78
R80 C50 R77
P6
P5
R81
C49 U14
C28 R46
C27 R45
C24 U9 C26 R42
R85 C25 R41
R82 C48 R84
R86 C47 R83
U1 R87
C46 U15
C23 R54
C19 U10 C22 R53
C21 R50
R3 R4 R5 C3 R91 C20 R49
R88 C45 R90
P4
P3
C43 U16 R92 C44 R89

R93
C18 R30
R94 C4 U7 C17 R20
C56
R1 C16 R26
R75 C15 R25
R72 C42 R74
C40 U13 R71 C41 R73
R95 R70
C5 C14 R22
U6
R2 C57 U3 C13 R21
C12 R18
R69 C11 R17
U12
P1
R66 R68
P2
C39 C53
C C54 R67
R65 C52
R64
C4 U5 C10 R14
LEISURE INDUSTRIES C9 R13
Figure 15-2 LAB Communications Board - Component Layout

R6 C8 R10
MK V LAB COMMS BOARD C7 R9
PCB 0801-410175 C34 U11 R63 C36 R62
PCBA 2501-410174 R60 C37 R61
ISSUE R59 C36 R58
REV R55 C35 R67
I0100
15-5

A brief description of the functionality of the LAB communications board is
provided in this section. See Figure 15-3.
96 Way Main I/F GAL 16V8 (PLD) Dual UART with RS 422 Drivers (DS9638) 10 Way Straight
Bus Connector Parallel Port (16c452) Receivers (DS9639) Headers
and EMC Line Filters
Port 1
EA5 I1 1
. CSA TxA 2(+) Txt Data
. CSB 3(-)
. CSP RxA
EA12 I6 6(+) Power Good
7(-)
EA13 I/o0 A0 TxB 4(+)
Rx1 Data
A1 5(-)
/DACK I/o1
8(+)
A2 PD0 SEF
IDO I/o2
/IOR 9(-)
PD1
I/o7 .
ID1 /IOW . Port 2
1
IO PD5
I/o3 2(+) Txt Dat
I9 3(-)
EA2 Int A Int B Reset Clk D0-D7
6(+) Power Good
EA3
7(-)
4(+)
EA4 5(-)
8(+)
/EIOR 9(-) SEF
/EIOW
Port 6
1
EILO
74HC04 2(+) Txt Data
3(-)
/EREST
6(+) Power Good
ECLK8M 7(-)
4(+)
EDO-ED7
5(-)
8(+)
SEF
I0101 9(-)
Figure 15-3 LAB Communications Board - Block Diagram
The LAB Communications Board provides six ports P1, P2, P3, P4, P5 and P6.
Port P1 is bi-directional and receives communications from the equipment
connected to the corresponding port of the SESI (Subsidiary Equipment Serial
Interface). The port P1 is reserved for Centralised Cash Control Equipment
(CCCE). Ports P2 to P6 are uni directional and do not receive communications
from subsidiary equipment.
Each port operates in conformance to the RS 422 standard with the speed of the
transmissions being 9600 bps. Each character or digit is represented by 11 bits (1
start bit + 8 data bits (packed BCD) + 1 parity bit (even) + 1 stop bit). The data
byte is transmitted with LSB first, parity transmitted after the MSB.
In addition to the usual RX and TX data signals, each port provides a "power
good" status signal to and receives a "Subsidiary Equipment Function" (SEF)
status signal from the SESI.
15-6 Revision 01
The "power good" status signal is an indication of the integrity of the power
supply level on the EGM main logic board and hence the LAB communications
board. The signal operates such that the differential voltage at the output of the
line driver is negative (Vd = -V) whenever the main logic board and any other
"sensitive" subsidiary boards (eg LAB Comms board) have "normal" power
applied.
Under all other conditions the line driver differential voltage is positive
(Vd = +V). The manufacturer of the SESI must ensure that the other power fail
conditions which may cause the output of the line driver to assume zero voltage or
high impedance are detected correctly.
The SEF status signal is an indication to the gaming machine that subsidiary
equipment connected is functioning correctly or that a request has been made for
play suspension. Under "normal" conditions the SEF differential signal voltage at
the line driver output is negative (Vd = -V). A positive signal (Vd = +V) is to be
interpreted by the gaming machine as a request to suspend play. "Fail" conditions
which may cause the output of the line driver to assume zero voltage or high
impedance must also be interpreted as a request to suspend play.
All unused ports will be "capped". In the "cap" for the connector, pins 6 and 7
(power good) are linked to pins 8 and 9 (SEF) respectively so that the gaming
machine can be provided with the SEF input signal.
15.1.3 LAB PSU Chassis Description

The LAB Comms PSU Fusing and Serial I/F Card Mounting Chassis (PSU chassis
is located behind the video monitor and provides power connections to the six
subsidiary equipment interfaces (third party vendor equipment). Each connection is
capable of supplying 12Vrms (nominal) AC at 0.5A.
Each output connection from the PSU chassis is protected by a 0.5A fuse.
Note that the PSU transformer (or winding) is part of the EGM main power supply
transformer via a separate winding.
The machine power supply provides the LAB Comms PSU with isolated 12 Vrms
AC at 3 A, via a flying lead from the 2-way connector JP29 on the Interface
Board. This power is supplied from a separate winding in the machine power
supply.
Revision 01 15-7
I0102
Mounting Holes
Connector
Fuse Holder
Figure 15-4 LAB PSU Chassis
The wire leading from pin 1 of the flying lead connector is connected in parallel
fashion to all 6 fuse holders and hence fuses.
The outer terminal (contact) of each fuse holder (fuse) is wired to pin 2 of its
corresponding 3 way power output connector.
The wire leading from pin 2 of the flying lead connector is connected in parallel
fashion to pin 2 of each of these power output connectors. Pin 3 of each power
output connector is unused.
In this way, 6, 12Vrms/0.5A power output connections are provided by the LAB
Communications PSU.
Connectors C1 C2 C3 C4 C5 C6
1 1
2 2
3 3
Fuses F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6
12 V AC
Input
I0103
Figure 15-5 PSU Chassis - PSU Fuse and Connector Wiring
15-8 Revision 01
PSU Fusing and Serial

Interface Card
Mounting Chassis
(Located behing the

video monitor)
12 V AC
Interface Board
Main Board
Logic
Cage
LAB Communications
Board
29 V AC
Six loom ribbon cable 28 V AC
12 V AC
Power Supply
I0104
Figure 15-6 LAB Communications Board and PSU Kit
Revision 01 15-9
CAUTION
When handling electrostatic sensitive devices
(ESDs) such as PCBs, take care to avoid
physical contact with components. PCBs should
be handled by their edges. ESD items should
not be placed on metal surfaces.
15.2.1 Removal
To remove the LAB communications board:
1. Open the cabinet door.
2. Switch the machine OFF. The main switch is located on the power supply
unit located in the bottom right hand corner of the machine.
4. Touch the side of the door for several seconds to ensure your body is at the
same potential as the board you are about to remove. This precaution is
necessary to minimise damage to the boards from electrostatic discharge.
Full electrostatic precautions are not practical in many gaming
environments.
5. Release the board from a connected position by using the board extractors
pins. Disconnect any looms to the board.
6. Withdraw the board from the logic cage and place in an antistatic bag
immediately.
15.2.2 Replacement
To replace:
1. Touch the side of the door for several seconds to ensure your body is at the
same potential as the machine.
2. Remove the replacement board from the antistatic bag.
3. Inspect both sides of the board for any signs of physical damage.
4. Reconnect the looms to the board. Slide the board into the correct logic cage
grooves and gently move the board into position on the interface board.
Close the logic cage door.
5. Switch the machine on. Close the cabinet door.
15-10 Revision 01
15.3 Connector Pin Assignments

The following tables list each pin on each input or output plug of the door
distribution board, the destination IC and pin number, function description and
signal name.
15.3.1 Interface Board Slot P6

The connector pin assignments are detailed in the following table:
Table 15-3 Interface Board Bus Connector for LAB Communications Board
Pin Pin Name Comment
A1 ---
B1 GNDD Ground
C1 ---
A2 ---
B2 ---
C2 ---
---
B3 GNDD Ground
C3 ---
A4 MSS0 Logic Door Security Switch 7 contact - NC
B4 ---
C4 ---
A5 ---
B5 GNDD Ground
C5 MSSO0 Logic Door Security Switch 7 contact - NO
A6 ---
B6 ---
C6 ---
A7 ---
B7 GNDD Ground
C7 ---
A8 ---
B8 ---
C8 ---
A9 ---
B9 GNDD Ground
C9 ---
A10 ---
B10 ---
C10 ---
A11 ---
B11 GNDD Ground
C11 ---
A12 ---
B12 ---
C12 ---
A13 ---
B13 GNDD Ground
C13 ---
A14 ---
B14 ---
C14 ---
A15 GNDD configuration pin, specify card number
B15 GNDD Ground
C15 VCC configuration pin, specify card number
Revision 01 15-11

A17 RNW CPU, read not write signal
B17 GNDD Ground
C17 ---
A18 /EIF CPU, IF interrupt
B18 EFHO CPU, FH0 interrupt
C18 /DACK CPU, data acknowledge
A19 /EFL CPU, FL interrupt
B19 GNDD Ground
C19 /EIL0 CPU, IL0 interrupt
A20 /ERESET CPU, external reset output
B20 /EIOW CPU, IO write signal
C20 /EIOR CPU, IO read signal
B21 GNDD Ground
C21 ECLK8M CPU, clock signal
B23 GNDD Ground
B25 GNDD Ground
A26 VBATE external battery backup
B26 /PFAIL power fail signal
A27 ---
B27 GNDD Ground
C27 ---
B29 GNDD Ground
A31 GNDD Ground
B31 ---
C31 GNDD Ground
A32 ---
B32 GNDD Ground
C32 P24VD +24V
15-12 Revision 01
CAUTION
For general maintenance of the LAB communications board:

Remove any dust or dirt from the external surfaces.
Check that all plugs are secure.
Revision 01 15-13
Notes
15-14 Revision 01
NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual Progressive Jackpot System
______Chapter 16______
Progressive Jackpot System
16.1 Overview ................................................................................. 16-3
16.2. Progressive SEI Board (410227) ........................................... 16-3
Revision 01 16-1
Progressive Jackpot System NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual
List of Figures
Figure 16-1 SEI Board - data flows ...............................................................................16-4
Figure 16-2 Cashcade - data flows................................................................................16-6
List of Tables
Table 16-1 SEI Board Configurations............................................................................16-3
Table 16-2 DIP Switch Settings .....................................................................................16-5
Table 16-3 Mikohn Interface..........................................................................................16-7
Table 16-4 Machine Interface........................................................................................16-7
Table 16-5 CDS Display Interface .................................................................................16-8
Table 16-6 Mikohn RS-422/485 Serial Interface ...........................................................16-8
16-2 Revision 01
16.1 Overview
The Mk4/5XR gaming machines can be configured to provide for Mystery
Cashcade Jackpots.
In a Mystery Cashcade Jackpot system, a number of machines are linked together
through a Controller, which is external to the gaming machine. As each game is
played, pulses are sent to the Controller from each of the gaming machines,
initiating the accumulation of a Cashcade Jackpot amount, which is shown on a
central display unit connected to the Controller. The jackpot is won when the
Cashcade Jackpot amount reaches some randomly selected value between
predetermined limits. The jackpot value is transmitted from the Controller to the
winning machine.
Machines may be configured to offer several different combinations of link, or
cashcade jackpots. Typical configurations provide two, three, or four jackpot
amounts (termed Double, Triple, or Quad Jackpots).
16.2. Progressive SEI Board (410227)

Overview
The Subsidiary Equipment Interface (SEI) Board (Part No.410227) enables LAB
RS-422 Communications to be converted to DACOM 5000 signals for a Mikohn
CON2 pulse system. The SEI Board can also receive information back from the
controller such that when a Mystery Cashcade Jackpot is won, the Subsidiary
Equipment Function line is activated until the jackpot is reset, causing the
machine to lock up. The SEI Board allows for both Mystery Cashcade and Link
Progressive Jackpot games to be connected to the gaming machine.
The SEI Board can also be used to connect the gaming machine to a BIPs Cashless
Transfer system. To support the BIPS interface, the serial ports have to provide 2-
way communication ports (Mikohn CON2 controllers only require one-way
communication ports). Figure 13-1 shows the SEI Board connections.
The SEI Board is mounted on a plate and the assembly is then mounted into the
subsidiary equipment board mounting plate.
The table below shows the possible board configurations:
Table 16-1 SEI Board Configurations

Option 1 Option 2 Option 3
Pulse Progressive system Serial Progressive system BIPs System
P5 and P6 inputs P5 input P1 in/output
two DACOM 5000 inputs RS-422 in/out DACOM 5000 in/output
two pulse outputs CDS display output CDS display output
CDS Display output
LED out
Revision 01 16-3
CDS Display
Controller
Optically Isolated
Transmission
at 9600 baud
RS-422 communications J9
at 9600 baud Machine ID
P5 or P1 J1 and Option
Dipswitches
SEF
LAB
Subsidiary
PWR GOOD
Communication Equipment
Board Interface
P6 SEF J2
CON2-1 CON2-2
J5 J4 J6 J10
J3 J8
Power Supply
LED
Optically Isolated RS-422/485 port

Optically Isolated
Pulsed Output 19200 baud
Input at 2400 baud
jpotflow.cdr
Connection to first Connection to second

Controller System Controller System
(Mikohn CON2-1) (Mikohn CON2-2)
Figure 16-1 SEI Board - data flows
Functional Description
The SEI Board is controlled by a Zilog Z8S180 microprocessor. This
microprocessor has two embedded UART channels that support two serial ports
on the SEI Board. An external DUART is used to provide two additional serial
ports.
Therefore, four channels are provided for the DACOM 5000 or RS-422/485
communication interface. Jumper link J11 is used to select between DACOM
5000 and RS-422/485.
The baud rates of these ports are as follows:
DACOM 5000 type interface: up to 9600 baud max.
RS-422/485 type interface: up to 19200 baud max.
The Z8S180 is an 8-bit microprocessor. It supports operating frequencies up to

16 MHz and provides two Asynchronous Serial Communication Interface (ASCI)
channels. The Z8S180 can address up to 1 Mbyte of memory. There are 32 Kbyte
RAM and 64 Kbyte ROM available on the SEI Board.
In case of power failure or brown outs, the power supply to the SEI Board is
guaranteed for another 20 ms. This gives time for the status/data of the system to
be stored in a non volatile RAM.
16-4 Revision 01
Option 1 - Jackpot Pulse System

The Subsidiary Equipment Interface (SEI) has two connections, one to Port P5
and one to Port P6 on the LAB Communications Board.
It also has two pulse outputs and two serial inputs to the two different progressive
systems Mystery Cashcade and Link Progressive. An LED is used to indicate that
pulses are being sent.
The SEI translates the LAB Communication Protocol to the M09, Link
Progressive protocol or the M00, Cashcade Jackpot Protocol, or both, depending
on how the interface is configured.
The SEI is configurable to allow for the jackpot type to be set, i.e. one Link
Progressive and one Cashcade, or two Cashcade interfaces.
The SEI has the ability to identify the machine so that they correspond to each of
the Mikohn CON2 machine ID numbers. This is done by using DIP switches that
allow for up to 40 ID numbers for each CON2 controller. When a Cashcade
jackpot is won by a machine, the SEI in that machine activates the Subsidiary
Equipment Function Line, causing the machine to lock until the jackpot is reset.
The DIP Switch settings for the two CON2 controllers are shown below.
Table 16-2 DIP Switch Settings

CON2-1 CON2-2
SWITCH Data Bit Description SWITCH Data Bit Description
1-6 0-5 Machine ID 1-6 0-5 Machine ID

7 6 Spare 7 6 Spare
8 7 Controller 8 7 Controller type
Type
DIP switch bit 8 enables each of the CON2 interfaces to be configured as a Link
Progressive or Cashcade type controller.
The SEI has the capability of driving a CDS Display for the Link Progressive
Jackpot Prize.
Mystery Cashcade
Where the machine is configured for Mystery Cashcade jackpots without Linked
Progressive jackpots, the SEI has only one connection (to P5) on the LAB
Communications Board. In addition, the CDS display is not required. A block
diagram of a Cashcade system is shown in Figure 16-2.
Mystery Cashcade Jackpot Light

A connection is provided for an external LED to advise the player the machine is
still contributing to the Cashcade Jackpot.
Option 2 - Jackpot Serial System

An RS-485 I/F is also implemented on the SEI Board. This allows for serial
communication between a controller and the machine. The RS-485 Port is
connected parallel to the J10 port (DACOM 5000) and replaces the same.
Revision 01 16-5
RS-422 communications Subsidiary

at 9600 baud
P5 J1 Equipment J8 Power
Interface Supply
SEF
LAB PWR GOOD J3
Communication LED
Board
J5 J4
Optically Isolated Optically Isolated

jpotflo2.cdr
Pulsed Output DACOM 5000 Input
at 2400 baud
Mikohn CON2
Controller
Figure 16-2 Cashcade - data flows
Option 3 - BIPs Cashless Transfer System

The SEI has a standard I/F that allows for connection to a BIPs system. In this
case, the bi-directional port J1 of the SEI connects to the port 1 (P1) on the LAB
Board and the bi-directional port J10 (DACOM 5000) on the SEI connects to the
BIP system.
Power Supply
The SEI board is supplied with 12 V DC. An on-board rectifier and switch mode
power supply regulator provide the logic with 5 V DC.
The power supply is monitored and if the 12 V DC supply is missing more than a
half wave (more than 20 ms delay), the POWER FAIL OUTPUT (PFO) signal is
activated. From the time PFO becomes active, the system has about 100 ms to
save the status of the current activities on the board and stops processing until
PFO and RESET inputs become inactive again.
Pulsed Interface to Mikohn CON2 controller

The controller has an optically isolated connection to the interface. The basic link
protocol (M09) is a 100 ms header followed by 50 ms pulses for each credit
played. A 200 ms header is used to specify a Jackpot hit - used only by Link
Progressive games, and followed by 50 ms pulses for the Jackpot type won, i.e.
Jackpot 0 has one 50 ms pulse, and Jackpot 3 has four 50 ms pulses.
To reset a combination hit a coin pulse must be sent, i.e a 100 ms header followed
by a 50 ms pulse.
The basic Mystery Cashcade protocol (M00) is 50 ms pulses for each credit
played. No headers are required for this protocol.
16-6 Revision 01
Two pulsed outputs are provided via J5 and J6 on the SEI Board.
Mystery Jackpot Light

A connection for an external LED is available to advise the player the machine is
still contributing to the Cashcade Jackpot. The jackpot light connects to J8 on the
SEI Board.
CON2 to Interface
The machine receives information from the controller via an optically isolated
DACOM 5000 input.
This machine sends out the current Jackpot value, which is continuously updated,
as well as the Jackpot win, and the machine ID.
Two interfaces are provided via J4 and J10 on the SEI Board.
Table 16-3 Mikohn Interface

Pin Number Description
1 RxD
2 COMMON
3 TxD
Interface to Machine
The interface between J1 on the SEI and the machine is shown below.
Table 16-4 Machine Interface

1 Common
2 RX Data +
3 RX Data -
4 TX Data +
5 TX Data -
6 Power Good +
7 Power Good -
8 Sub. Equipment Function +
9 Sub. Equipment Function -
10 NC
Interface to CDS Display

The connection to the CDS Display controller is via a DACOM 5000 uni-direction
port, as shown in the table below.
The display controller board connects to J9 on the SEI Board.
Revision 01 16-7
Table 16-5 CDS Display Interface

1 RxD
2 RxD
3 COMMON
4 COMMON
5 TxD
6 TxD
7 COMMON
8 COMMON
9 RxD
10 RxD
Mikohn Serial Interface

The SEI Board has one RS-422 port (J7) to support the Mikohn Serial Protocol
CON2 RS-422/485 interface. The RS-422/485 is used instead of DACOM
5000 to talk to a CON2 controller. The optical isolation for this interface is on
the Comms Inlet board. The SEI Board provides the RS-422/485 signals to the
Comms Inlet board.
The table below shows the pinout of the RS-422/485 connector.
Table 16-6 Mikohn RS-422/485 Serial Interface

1 GND
2 TxDN
3 TxDP
4 DTRN
5 DTRP
6 RxDN
7 RxDP
8 DCDN
9 DCDP
10 NC
Power Input
The SEI receives 12 V DC at 0.5 A from the LAB Power Supply Unit. Power is
connected to J3 on the SEI Board.
16-8 Revision 01
NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual Machine Fault Finding
________Chapter 17________
Machine Fault Finding
17.1 Fault Finding ...................................................................................... 3
Revision 01 17-1
Machine Fault Finding NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual
List of Tables
Table 17-1 Fault Finding..................................................................................................... 3
17-2 Revision 01
17.1 Fault Finding

Equipment connected to Auxiliary power socket Replace auxiliary power socket
auxiliary power sockets & fuse is blown. fuse.
has no power.
Machine has no power. A. Mains socket 1. Check that the mains socket is
supplying the machine live.
is not live. 2. If the mains socket is dead, check
that the circuit breaker at the
distribution board is on.
B. Main board not 3. Turn off mains power for 5
showing 4 lit red LEDs seconds, then turn power on.
(ie, sequential 4. Check main board seating and
display). links. If condition continues,
replace the Main Board.
No power-up cycle. A. Coin jam in the Coin 1. Clear coin jam from the Coin
Chute Assembly. Chute Assembly.
B. Faulty hopper photo- 2. Check that the hopper photo-optic
optic detector. detector is not damaged or
disconnected. If the detector is
damaged, replace the detector.
C. Cable fault. 3. Check that the looms are
correctly seated and have
continuity.
E. Faulty Interface 4. If the looms are OK, replace the
Board. Backplane.
F. Faulty Main Board. 5. If there is still no power, replace
the Main Board.
Fluorescent lamps, A. Faulty lamp or 1. If only one lamp is faulty, replace
animation lamp, and fluorescent driver. the fluorescent tube or driver, or
pushbutton lamps not lit. the pushbutton lamp or
microswitch.
B. Faulty power supply 2. Check that the power supply
assembly. assembly is operating correctly. If
not, replace the power supply
assembly.
C. Faulty loom between: 3. Check cables and looms and
the fluorescent ensure lamps are correctly
lamps and the seated.
power supply
assembly.
Revision 01 17-3

D. Faulty connection or 4. Check cables, looms, boards and
loom between: lamps are correctly seated and
the animation lamps have continuity.
/ pushbutton lamps
and Interface Board.
the power supply
assembly and the
Interface Board.
the Interface Board
and the Main Board.
the Interface Board
and the Driver
Board.
E. Faulty Main Board. 5. If there are still no lamps lit,
replace the Main Board.
Video monitor blank. A. Faulty power supply 1. Check that mains power is
assembly. available at the power supply.
See Power Supply Assembly.
B. Faulty video monitor. 2. Check that the mains power
supply is available at the monitor.
If available, replace the monitor.
C. Faulty loom between 3. Check that the looms are
the monitor and the correctly seated and have
power supply or continuity.
between the Main
Board and the
monitor.
D. Faulty Main Board. 4. If the condition persists, replace
the Main Board.
Video monitor colour or A. Monitor settings 1. Carry out Basic Colours Test from
picture incorrect. incorrect. the Video Monitor Test Menu in
Operator Mode.
Work through the procedure for
adjusting and testing the video
monitor as detailed in the chapter
Video Monitor.
B. Faulty monitor. 2. If the condition persists, replace
the monitor.
YO-YO message while A. Coin jammed in the 1. Remove jammed coin.
machine not being coin validator sensor
played. assembly.
B. Faulty coin validator. 2. Replace the coin comparator.
C. Fault in the loom 3. Check that the loom is correctly
between the coin seated and has continuity.
validator and the
Backplane.
Sound too loud or too A. Volume control 1. Adjust the volume using Sound
soft. requires adjustment. System Setup in the Operator
Setup / Selections Menu.
2. If the condition persists, replace
the Main Board.
17-4 Revision 01

No sound. A. Volume control 1. Adjust the volume using Sound
requires adjustment. System Setup in the Operator
Setup / Selections Menu.
B. Speaker open circuit. 2. Remove the connectors from the
speaker terminals and check that
there is 6 to 8 across the
speaker terminals. If not, replace
the speaker.
Reconnect the speaker terminals.
C. Faulty loom between 3. If there is no power at the
the Interface Board speaker, check that the looms are
and the speaker. correctly seated and are
physically sound.
D. Faulty Interface Board 4. If the looms are OK, replace the
Interface Board.
E. Faulty Main Board. 5. If the condition persists, replace
the Main Board.
Hopper does not rotate. A. Faulty loom between 1. Check that the loom is correctly
hopper and Interface seated and has continuity.
Board.
B. Faulty hopper motor. 2. If motor is not operating, replace
the hopper.
Hopper motor running A. Hopper disc is 1. Remove hopper, dismantle it and
slowly. binding. remove foreign matter.
B. Motor spindle bent. 2. Replace the hopper.
C. Faulty hopper motor 3. Replace the hopper motor
controller. controller.
COIN ACCEPTOR A. Faulty loom between: 1. Check that the looms are
FAULT, COIN OPTIC the coin validator correctly seated and have
FAULT message. and Interface Board continuity.
the comparator
PCBA and the
sensor assembly.
B. Coins jammed in coin 2. Remove coin jam.
validator sensor
assembly.
Coins jamming in the Coin diverter Adjust the position of the diverter.
diverter window. jamming.
Coins continually A. Sample coin not in the 1. Check that the sample coin is
rejected. correct location in the located firmly between the
sensor assembly. scanner unit and the fork of the
rail insert.
B. Faulty comparator. 2. Replace the comparator.
ILLEGAL COIN OUT A. Dirty hopper photo- 1. Clean the hopper photo-optic
message on power-up. optic detector/emitter. detector/emitter.
B. Faulty hopper. 2. Run a hopper test (see Machine
Modes) to check that the hopper
motor stops when the correct
number of coins have been
ejected.
Revision 01 17-5

All coins are going to the A. Hopper probe shorted 1. Clear the short.
cash box and the hopper to ground.
is empty.
B. Faulty coin diverter 2. Run a coin chuting test (see
solenoid on the coin Machine Modes) to check that the
chute assembly. solenoid has power.
C. Coin diverter 3. Adjust the position of the coin
jamming. diverter.
Reject coins not falling Coins jammed in the Carefully clear the reject chute.
into the coin tray. reject chute.
Coins accepted but not A. Faulty loom between 1. Check that the loom is correctly
registered on the coin the coin validator and seated and has continuity.
counter and the machine the Interface Board.
locks out.
B. Faulty coin 2. Replace the comparator.
comparator.
3 WAY METERING Corrupt data. Perform a memory reset (see
ERROR message. Inconsistent data Machine Modes).
across all three
electronic audit meter
sets.
17-6 Revision 01
NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual Appendix A
Appendix A
Games
Spinning Reel Games........................................................................................ 3
Revision 01 A-1
Appendix A NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual
List of Figures:
Figure A-1 MK V Video Game Screen Example.................................................................. 4
Figure A-2 MK V Pay Table Example ................................................................................. 5
A-2 Revision 01
Spinning Reel Games

The Jubilee Mk4/5XR gaming machine is available with MkV Spinning Reel
games.
The screen displays a simulation of the reels spinning, which, after a short time
'come to rest'. The resultant positions of the various symbols (refer to Fig A-1) is
assessed for a winning combination.
If the resultant combination is a winner (the winning combination(s) can be
checked, if the machine has a top box, with the pay table provided on the top box
artwork, if the machine has no top box, with the pay table provided on the belly
panel artwork. Figure A-2 shows an example of a pay table), the machine
responds by flashing the corresponding symbols and by emitting 'win' sounds. The
game software displays the amount of credits won on the screen, prompts the
player to gamble the win (if available), then adds them to the player's credit total.
This action may vary slightly depending on the software, customer and legal
requirements.
The gamble features can vary considerably between games, however, the concept
is the same. The player is given the opportunity to gamble the credits won for a
chance to double the total. This 'doubling up' may continue for up to five times (or
possibly more) consecutively.
If the combination is not a winner, the machine will end the game if no credits are
remaining or prompt the player to continue.
Revision 01 A-3
K Q
4 4
6 6
2 2
K
8 8
1 1
9 9
Q K
3 3
7 7
5 5
SCV018
Figure A-1 MK V Video Game Screen Example
A-4 Revision 01
Play up to 90 credits. Bet up to 10 credits per line.
Prince, K, Q, J, 10 & 9
1000 10000 3000 5000 2000

500 5000 1500 2500 1000
100 1000 300 500 200
10 100 30 50 20
2 20 6 10 4
500 5000 1500 2500 1000
100 1000 300 500 200
50 500 150 250 100
500 5000 1500 2500 1000
75 750 225 375 150
25 250 75 125 50
500 5000 1500 2500 1000
50 500 150 250 100
20 200 60 100 40
500 5000 1500 2500 1000
40 400 120 200 80
15 150 45 75 30
500 5000 1500 2500 1000
30 300 90 150 60
10 100 30 50 20
500
25
5
5000
250
50
* 1500
75
15
2500
125
25
1000
50
10
2 20 6 10 4
1 2 3 5 6 7 9 10 14 15
Scattered 500
500
1000 1500 2500 3000 3500 4500 5000 7000 7500
25 50 75 125 150 175 225 250 350 375
Peacocks 255
52
10
4
15
6
25
10
30
12
35
14
45
18
50
20
70
28
75
30
pay any. 2
18 21 25 27 30 35 45 50 70 90
Scattered wins are multiplied by total number 9000 10500 12500 13500 15000 17500 22500 25000 35000 45000
of credits staked. 450 525 625 675 750 875 1125 1250 1750 2250
To change bet per line, press the bet button of 90 105 125 135 150 175 225 250 350 450
your choice. To start the game, press the 36 42 50 54 60 70 90 100 140 180
payline button of your choice.
GAMBLE BUTTON FLASHING: DOUBLE UP FEATURE APPEARS AFTER WIN. PRESS IF NOT REQUIRED.
DOUBLE UP GAMBLE BUTTON NOT FLASHING: AFTER WIN. PRESS GAMBLE BUTTON TO DOUBLE UP.
PRESS RED OR BLACK. EXTRA
FEATURE WIN IS DOUBLED IF YOUR CHOICE IS CORRECT. WINNINGS MAY BE GAMBLED UP TO 5 TIMES.
MAXIMUM WIN PER GAMBLE IS $10,OOO.
LINES
TOPBOX2
Figure A-2 MK V Pay Table Example
Revision 01 A-5
Notes
A-6 Revision 01
NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual Glossary
Glossary
ADH Aristocrat Disc Hopper.
Any pays Symbols are read anywhere on the payline, and not
necessarily left to right or right to left.
ARM250 Advanced RISC Machine - a type of integrated
microcontroller
ASIC Application Specific Integrated Circuit
Audit key switch To display the electronic audit meters on the monitor, insert
the audit key and turn it 90 clockwise.
Audit meters See electronic and electro-mechanical meters.
Base game The game provided with the EGM as described in the
paytable and mid panel display.
Base A specially designed box unit on which the cabinet stands.
The cash box is usually located securely within the base.
Bilock A range of high-security locks manufactured by the
Australian Lock Company Pty. Ltd. that features a unique
U shaped keyway.
Book pay After the player presses the COLLECT button, the credits
are manually paid out to a player and recorded in the
payout book.
Button panel The series of buttons across the front of the cabinet that the
player uses to control game play.
Cabinet The major cabinet or casing in which the workings of the
machine are housed.
Cable channel assembly Metal channels used to route the power cables and
communication cables to Slant Top machines. The
channels also locate the machines.
Cancel credit When a player attempts to COLLECT a credit amount
greater than the amount that the Hopper can pay out, the
machine locks up. When this occurs, the Cancel Credit
procedure allows for the player to be paid manually and the
credit on the machine cancelled to zero.
Cash box The high security compartment used to hold any coins not
held in the hopper.
Clearance The value of coins removed from the cash box, usually
daily.
CMOS Complementary metal oxide semi-conductor.
Coin detectors See photo-optic detectors.
Revision 01 1
Glossary NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual
Coin jam When coins jam in the coin assembly chute.

Coin selector See coin comparator.
Coin tray The tray at the bottom of the cabinet into which payout or
reject coins are deposited for collection.
Coin validator Device that senses physical and magnetic properties of a
coin tendered to determine if valid and acceptable for play.
Collect cash To convert the amount shown on the CREDIT meter to
cash, the player presses the COLLECT button that activates
the hopper to pay the coins into the coin tray.
Console See base.
CPU Central processing unit.
Credit Coins inserted into the machine register as credits. One
coin may equal more than one credit. Prizes are shown as
credits until such time as the player chooses to collect
them.
D/A Digital to analog
DES Data Encryption System
DSB Data Storage Board
ECC Error Checking and Correction
EEPROM Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory
EGM Electronic Gaming Machine
EHM Electronic Hard Meter
Electromechanical The electromechanical meters or counters. These meters
meters are non-resettable and are cumulative for the life of the
machine.
Electronic meters The electronic audit meters that provide audit information.
EMC Electromagnetic Compatibility
EPROM Erasable programmable read only memory.
ESB EHM SPI Board
Feature game Additional game to the base game that provides variety and
an additional means of winning.
Hopper refill If the hopper runs out of coins, the operator opens the
cabinet and places a specific number of coins into the
hopper.
House The club, casino or organisation running the games.
Hyperlink A link progressive jackpot feature.
I/O Input/output.
2 Revision 01
NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual Glossary
IC Integrated circuit
Illegal coin A coin which is incorrectly paid out by the hopper.
Intelligent bezel Sites the accept/reject slot for note placement on the bill
acceptor fascia panel.
Installation A club, casino or other place which has a number of
gaming machines.
I/O Input/output.
Jackpot key switch To reset the machine after a cashier payout or after a
machine fault has been corrected, insert the J key, turn it
180 clockwise and back again.
LAB New South Wales Liquor Administration Board.
LED Light emitting diode.
Left to right pay Symbols are read from left to right for prize determination.
Links A series of machines are linked together by an external
progressive controller. Each machine contributes to a
common progressively incremented jackpot and is
displayed separately for the player to see.
Lockup A lockup renders the machine unplayable and is triggered
either by a malfunction, when a jackpot has been won (if
the program permits), or when the player has pressed the
CASH OUT pushbutton when there is more than the cancel
credit amount in credit.
Manual pay A book payment made for any amount in excess of the
cancel credit limit of the machine.
Max bet A button that automatically bets the maximum amount
possible on a game.
Meters Electronic (soft) meters and electro-mechanical meters
located within the machine that record and display
important audit information for the operator.
Microprocessor The computer component which controls and processes
game play instructions.
Multiline A game in which a player bets on additional lines to
multiply the chance of a prize.
Multiplier A game in which a player bets additional coins on any one
game to multiply the value of the prize.
Payline(s) The line or lines which indicate where the symbols must
line up for a player to win.
Payout book Book used to record hopper refill amount, jackpot amount
and cancel credit amount.
Revision 01 3
Glossary NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual
PCBA Printed circuit board assembly.

Play button One of the illuminated buttons on the button panel, used in
game play.
PLD Programmable logic device.
Progressive jackpot This is an additional jackpot to the game's normal jackpot.
This jackpot increments by a fixed percentage of the
machine's turnover and is displayed separately for the
player to see.
PROM Programmable Read Only Memory.
QCC Quick Change Core a facility offered by Bilocks (see
above) where the keyed core of the lock is fitted separate to
the lock barrel.
Refill Money you add to a hopper by opening the door and
inserting coins, usually when the machine has run out of
coins.
Reserve A button on the machine which allows a player to indicate
to others that the machine is reserved. This reserve message
remains lit for 3 minutes.
RISC Reduced Instruction Set Computer.
Scattered pays Symbols can be above, below or on the payline to qualify
for a prize.
SEF Subsidiary equipment function.
SESI Subsidiary equipment serial interface.
Short time out The machine locks up when a coin jams across the hopper
photo-optic detector for more than 0.5 seconds.
Soft meters See electronic meters.
SPI Serial Peripheral Interface
SRAM Static Random Access Memory.
Symbols The various designs on the reel strips. Common symbols
include Jacks, Kings, Aces, Cherries, and Gold Bars.
Top box The box unit on top of the cabinet which carries the game
graphics, rules and score card.
Yo-Yo A coin travelling in reverse to its normal direction. For
example: a coin is dangled through and withdrawn from the
coin entry slot of the machine in an attempt to cheat the
machine of a coin during game play.
4 Revision 01
NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual Index
Index
Bill Acceptor (see Bank Note Acceptor
A
Assembly) ............................................... 7-3
Accounting Information ............................. 3-16 Bilock Locks ...................................... 1-7, 4-10
ARM RISC ................................................ 11-4 BIPs ........................................................... 16-3
ARM250 Microprocessor ........................ 11-10
C
Artwork
main door .............................................. 4-13 Cabinet Door ............................................... 4-5
top box .................................................. 4-20 artwork .................................................. 4-13
Audit Key ..................................................... 4-9 latch ........................................................ 4-5
lock ......................................................... 4-7
B
photo-optic sensor .................................. 4-8
Ballast .............................................. 4-12, 4-22 security ................................................... 4-7
Bank Note Acceptor Assembly .................... 7-3 Cabinet maintenance ................................. 4-23
assembly replacement ............................ 7-16 Cash Box ................................................... 4-11
bank note acceptor .................................. 7-5 Cash Box Chute ......................................... 4-11
bezel ............................................ 7-10, 7-13 Cashcade Jackpots ..................................... 16-3
communications .................................... 7-10 Cashless Transfer ...................................... 16-6
configuration ......................................... 7-13 Cathode Ray Tube ....................................... 9-3
DIP switches ......................................... 7-13 CCB ........................................................... 14-3
dual-cage housing .................................... 7-4 CCCE ........................................................ 15-6
electronics ............................................... 7-8 CDS Display .............................................. 16-7
faults ...................................................... 7-13 Coin Entry Test ......................................... 3-26
GL5 serial interface ............................... 7-10 Coin Handling ............................................. 6-3
jams ....................................................... 7-16 I/O driver board interface ..................... 13-7
LEDs ........................................... 7-10, 7-13 main board interface ........................... 11-20
main board interface ............................ 11-22 maintenance .......................................... 6-11
maintenance ........................................... 7-20 Coin Tray .................................................. 4-19
microcontroller ........................................ 7-8 Coin Validator ............................................. 6-4
note entry ................................................. 7-7 conector pinouts ...................................... 6-8
physical description ................................. 7-3 diverter solenoid ..................................... 6-9
scanning system ..................................... 7-10 fault finding .......................................... 6-11
security .......................................... 3-10, 7-7 photo-optic sensor .................................. 6-9
stacker ........................................... 7-6, 7-10 replacement ............................................. 6-7
stacker replacement ............................... 7-15 security ................................................... 3-9
troubleshooting ...................................... 7-18 yoyo ........................................................ 6-6
video level calibration ........................... 7-20 Collect Limit ................................................ 3-6
Bank Note Acceptor Information ............... 3-24 Combination Test ...................................... 3-29
Battery Backup Circuit ............................ 11-16 Communications Configuration Board 11-22,
Belly Panel 14-3
artwork .................................................. 4-13 configuration ......................................... 14-4
door ....................................................... 4-19 connector pin assignments .................... 14-7
security .................................................. 4-20 functional description ........................... 14-4
Bezel ................................................ 7-10, 7-13 maintenance .......................................... 14-7
Revision 01 Index 1
Index NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual
removal ................................................. 14-6 top box .................................................. 4-20

CPU ......................................................... 11-10 Fuses .......................................................... 5-11
CRT ............................................................. 9-3
G
Current Lockup Menu ................................ 3-33
Gamble Feature ........................................... 3-5
D
Gamble Statistics ....................................... 3-21
Debug Port ............................................... 11-13 Game Display .............................................. 3-4
Debugging ................................................ 11-13 Game Display Shelf ................................... 4-12
Degaussing ................................................... 9-7 Game Replay ............................................. 3-19
DEMON ................................................... 11-13 Game Statistics .......................................... 3-20
Diagnostic Information .............................. 3-21 Games
Diagnostic LEDs ...................................... 11-10 multiline .................................................. 3-6
Diverter Solenoid ......................................... 6-9 multiplier ................................................ 3-6
Door security .............................................. 3-10 GL5 Serial Interface .................................. 7-10
DRAM ..................................................... 11-15
H
Dual-cage housing ........................................ 7-4
Hopper ......................................................... 8-3
E
basic operation ........................................ 8-6
EEPROMS ............................................... 11-16 coin dispensing ....................................... 8-7
Electromechanical Meter Board coin jamming prevention ........................ 8-7
connector pin assignment ...................... 10-8 disassembly ........................................... 8-10
functional description ............................ 10-4 fault finding .......................................... 8-12
general description ................................ 10-3 full detection ........................................... 8-7
light tower interface .............................. 10-5 interface signals ...................................... 8-7
maintenance ......................................... 10-10 main board interface ........................... 11-21
meter detection ...................................... 10-5 maintenance .......................................... 8-13
meter drive outputs ................................ 10-5 parts ........................................................ 8-4
overcurrent protection ........................... 10-5 probe ....................................................... 8-7
PCB expansion ...................................... 10-5 refill ........................................................ 2-8
replacement ........................................... 10-7 replacement ............................................. 8-8
security interface ................................... 10-5 security ................................................. 3-10
serial interface ....................................... 10-4 test ........................................................ 3-26
Electromechanical Meters .......................... 3-11
I
security .................................................. 3-13
Electronic Meters ....................................... 3-13 I/O Data Bus ............................................ 11-10
EPROM ................................................... 11-15 I/O Driver Board
Error Log Display ...................................... 3-23 coin handling interface ......................... 13-7
External I/O Expansion ............................ 11-14 connector pin assignment .................... 13-11
EMI protection ..................................... 13-6
F
functional description ........................... 13-3
Factory Test ............................................... 3-28 LEDs ..................................................... 13-9
Fault Finding .............................................. 17-3 physical description .............................. 13-3
fault mode .................................................. 3-11 power supply ......................................... 13-6
Fault Mode ................................................. 3-33 pushbuttons and lamps .......................... 13-6
FIP ............................................................. 14-4 replacement ......................................... 13-10
Fluorescent Lighting Inrush Current Scenario ............................... 5-9
cabinet door ........................................... 4-12 Installation ................................................... 2-5
power ..................................................... 5-10 pre-installation requirements .................. 2-3
Index 2 Revision 01
NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual Index
Interface Board ............................................ 1-4 physical description ................................ 1-3

connectors ............................................. 12-7 setup ...................................................... 3-30
physical description ............................... 12-3 technical description ............................... 4-5
replacement ......................................... 12-18 Machine Lockup ........................................ 1-10
technical description .............................. 12-5 Main Board ................................................ 11-4
architecture ........................................... 11-6
J
connector description .......................... 11-24
Jackpot Reset Key ........................................ 4-9 functional description ........................... 11-6
Jurisdictional Meters .................................. 3-17 interface board connection .................. 11-22
K physical description .............................. 11-5
power control interface ....................... 11-17
Key Switches ............................................... 4-9 replacement ......................................... 11-23
Keyboard Port .......................................... 11-13 serial channels ..................................... 11-21
Keys ............................................................. 1-6 technical description ............................. 11-8
L Mains Cable Clamp ..................................... 2-7
Mains Switch ............................................... 5-3
LAB Communications Board .............. 1-4, 15-3
Mechanical Switches ............................... 11-19
basic operation ...................................... 15-6
security ............................................... 11-20
connector pin assignments ................... 15-11
Memory ................................................... 11-15
fuses ...................................................... 15-8
Meters
maintenance ......................................... 15-13
security ................................................. 3-13
physical description ............................... 15-3
Meters SRAM ......................................... 11-15
PSU ....................................................... 15-7
Mid Trim Panel ......................................... 4-14
replacement ......................................... 15-10
Mikohn CON2 ......................... 16-3, 16-5, 16-6
Lamp Test .................................................. 3-25
Mikohn Interface ............................ 11-14, 16-8
Latch Bar ..................................................... 4-5
Modes .......................................................... 3-3
Layout Setup .............................................. 3-33
Monitor.......................................................... 9-3
LEDs
degaussing ....................................... 1-4, 9-7
bank note acceptor assembly ....... 7-10, 7-13
display .................................................... 3-7
I/O driver board ..................................... 13-9
general description .................................. 9-3
main boad ............................................ 11-10
maintenance ............................................ 9-6
Light Tower Interface ................................ 10-5
picture adjustment ................................... 9-4
Locks .................................................. 1-7, 4-10
power supply ........................................... 9-4
cabinet door ............................................. 4-7
replacement ............................................. 9-6
Lockup ....................................................... 1-10
Monitor Mask ............................................ 4-18
Lockup Menu ............................................. 3-33
Mystery Cashcade Jackpot Light ............... 16-5
Logic Cage ................................................. 4-11
Mystery Cashcade Jackpots ....................... 16-3
Low-Power Mode Signal ............................. 5-9
O
M
Operator Mode ................................. 1-10, 3-14
Machine
Operator Setup / Selections Menu ............. 3-30
basic operation ........................................ 1-8
Optical Security ................................ 4-7, 11-19
components ............................................. 4-3
Overcurrent Protection ................................ 5-8
description ............................................... 4-3
Overvoltage Protection ................................ 5-8
dimensions .............................................. 2-4
identification ......................................... 3-16 P
maintenance ........................................... 4-23 Panic Log Display ..................................... 3-23
modes ...................................................... 3-3 Periodic Meters ......................................... 3-18
Revision 01 Index 3
Index NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual
Photo-optic Sensor ............................... 4-8, 6-9 mechanical switches ........................... 11-20

Play Mode ............................................ 1-8, 3-4 optical ................................................. 11-19
Playbuttons ................................................. 4-14 SEF .......................................... 15-3, 15-4, 15-6
Power Fail Signal ......................................... 5-9 SEI ............................................................. 16-3
Power Save Mode ...................................... 3-33 Self Test Mode .......................................... 3-24
Power Supply ............................................... 5-3 Self-test ........................................................ 3-8
basic operation ........................................ 5-5 SESI .......................................................... 15-6
fuses ...................................................... 5-11 Soft Meters (see Electronic Meters) .......... 3-13
inrush current scenario ............................ 5-9 Sound ....................................................... 11-11
low-power mode signal ........................... 5-9 Sound Effects Test ..................................... 3-28
maintenance ........................................... 5-12 Sound System Setup .................................. 3-32
output requirements ................................. 5-7 Sounds ......................................................... 3-8
overcurrent protection ............................. 5-8 SPI Bus .................................................... 11-18
overvoltage protection ............................. 5-8 Spinning Reel Games .................................. 3-5
physical connections ............................... 5-9 Stacker ......................................................... 7-6
power fail signal ...................................... 5-9 Subsidiary Equipment Interface ................ 16-3
replacement ........................................... 5-11
T
PSU Chassis ....................................... 1-4, 15-7
Pushbuttons .................................................. 3-8 Top Box ..................................................... 4-20
artwork .................................................. 4-20
R
fluorescent lighting ............................... 4-20
Real Time Clock ...................................... 11-16 Top Trim Panel ......................................... 4-17
setup ...................................................... 3-32 Tunes ........................................................... 3-8
Record Refill ................................................ 2-9
V
Reel Spin Speed Setup ............................... 3-32
Reserve Button ............................................. 3-6 VACS .......................................................... 6-5
Reset Signal ............................................. 11-12 Video Controller ............................... 9-3, 11-12
RISC ............................................................ 1-3 Video Monitor (see Monitor)
Video Monitor Test ................................... 3-27
S
Voltage Selector Switch .............................. 2-7
Security ................................... 3-9, 3-11, 11-19
W
bank note acceptor assembly ......... 3-10, 7-7
cabinet door ............................................. 4-7 Watchdog Timer ...................................... 11-13
coin validator .......................................... 3-9 Y
door ....................................................... 3-10
electromechanical meters ...................... 3-13 Yoyo .......................................................... 17-4
hopper ................................................... 3-10
Index 4 Revision 01

Manual de Servicio MK4-5 (Parte 1) PDF

Încărcat de

Informații document

Titlu original

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Manual de Servicio MK4-5 (Parte 1) PDF

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

TM

NEW SOUTH WALES

JUBILEE GAMING TECHNOLOGY,

Important Safety Information

Inform Yourself and Your Staff

Amendment Amendment Date Insertion Date Your Initials

Amendment Amendment Date Insertion Date Your Initials

Aristocrat Jubilee MK4/5XR Manuals

Primarily intended for operators of Aristocrat

Primarily intended for service technicians. The

Primarily intended for operators and service

This page intentionally left blank

User of the Manual

Warnings, Cautions and Notes

Brief History of Aristocrat Leisure Industries

Head Office International Offices

1.2 Basic Operation .............................................................................. 1-8

1.2.1 Play Mode......................................................................................... 1-8

2.2 Inspection on Delivery.................................................................... 2-5

2.3 Installation Procedure .................................................................... 2-5

2.3.1 Mounting ........................................................................................... 2-5

Machine Modes 3-1

3.2 Play Mode ........................................................................................ 3-4

3.2.1 Player Operation............................................................................... 3-5

3.3 Operator Mode .............................................................................. 3-14

3.3.1 Machine Identification ..................................................................... 3-16

3.3.2 Accounting Information................................................................... 3-16

Cabinet, Door and Top Box 4-1

4.2 Technical Description .................................................................... 4-5

4.2.1 Cabinet Door .................................................................................... 4-5

4.3 General Maintenance ................................................................... 4-23

Power Supply Assembly 5-1

5.2 Basic Operation .............................................................................. 5-5

5.3 Functional Specification ................................................................ 5-7

5.3.1 Input Requirements .......................................................................... 5-7

5.4 Removal and Replacement Procedures ..................................... 5-11

5.4.1 Fuses .............................................................................................. 5-11

5.5 General Maintenance.................................................................... 5-12

Coin Handling Assembly 6-1

6.2 Basic Operation .............................................................................. 6-4

6.2.1 Validation .......................................................................................... 6-4

6.3 Removal and Replacement ............................................................ 6-7

6.4 Clearing Coin Jams ........................................................................ 6-7

6.5 CN133A Coin Validator Connector Pinouts .................................. 6-8

6.6 Diverter Solenoid and Photo-Optic Sensor .................................. 6-9

6.6.1 Physical Description ......................................................................... 6-9

6.7 Fault Finding ................................................................................. 6-11

6.8 General Maintenance ................................................................... 6-11

Bank Note Acceptor 7-1

7.1.1 Overview........................................................................................... 7-3

7.2 Installation and Machine Conditions .......................................... 7-13

7.2.1 Configuration Setup........................................................................ 7-13

7.3 Removal and Replacement Procedures ..................................... 7-15

7.3.1 Clearing the Bank Note Stacker ..................................................... 7-15

7.4 Care and Maintenance ................................................................. 7-18

7.4.1 Troubleshooting.............................................................................. 7-18

8.1.1 Physical Description ......................................................................... 8-3

8.2 Removal and Replacement ............................................................ 8-8

8.2.1 Removal............................................................................................ 8-8

8.3 Clearing Coin Jams ........................................................................ 8-9

8.4 Disassembly and Assembly......................................................... 8-10

8.4.1 Disassembly ................................................................................... 8-10

8.5 Fault Finding ................................................................................. 8-12